JP2018020244A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which performs presentations in a new mode using operation means, and thereby which gives more enjoyment to a player to enable further enhancement of game amusement.SOLUTION: Before operation means is operated within a predetermined operation effective period, a predetermined prior operation display presentation is to be performed in a first presentation display device and in a second presentation display device. After the operation means is operated, a predetermined post operation display presentation is to be performed in the first presentation display device and the second presentation display device. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform presentations in a new mode using the operation means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 161

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in a game board for playing a game, a game area into which a game medium such as a game ball is driven is partitioned, and a number of obstacle nails are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the game area. In addition, a prize opening (for example, a general prize opening, a variable prize opening, a starting prize opening (starting opening), an accessory prize opening, a big prize, etc.) that can receive a game medium at an appropriate position in the game area. A plurality of mouths, etc.), and a predetermined number of game media are paid out when the game media are received at the winning opening. Further, the game board includes an opening formed separately from the game area in a substantially central portion, and includes an effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image behind the opening. Then, when the game medium is received in the start winning opening (start opening) of the winning openings, after drawing a predetermined lottery result, the effect display means suggesting the lottery result lottery over a predetermined time on the effect display means Depending on the displayed lottery results, the opportunity to receive game media into the big prize opening etc. is increased by opening and closing the prize winning opening and the big prize opening etc. that are normally closed in a predetermined pattern. Thus, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, in this type of gaming machine, there is known one that performs a player-participation-type effect that requires a player's operation with respect to an operation means for effecting (such as an effect button) during the progress of the game. In such a gaming machine, the operation means is operated in a player-participation-type production, thereby changing the production performed in the game progression process and exciting the game (for example, see Patent Document 1). .

JP 2014-087595 A

  However, it is widely known that the player-participation-type production as described above is performed, and it is difficult to further improve the game entertainment by performing the participation-type production with the same configuration of operation means as in the past. there were.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making a player more entertaining and further improving the game entertainment by performing an effect using an operation means in a new mode.

[Solution 1]
The gaming machine of the present invention is
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined game using a game medium and gives a predetermined game value based on a result of the game,
Control means for controlling effects related to the game;
Operation means having an operation receiving portion for receiving an operation by a player;
First effect display means for performing a predetermined display effect based on control by the control means;
A second effect display means provided separately from the first effect display means, wherein a predetermined display effect is performed based on control by the control means;
With
The operation receiving portion is made of a transparent member, and the second effect display means is disposed so as to be visible through the operation receiving portion,
The control means includes
A pre-operation display effect that is controlled so that a predetermined pre-operation display effect is performed by the first effect display device and the second effect display device before the operation device is operated within a predetermined operation effective period. Execution means;
After-operation display effect execution means for controlling the first effect display means and the second effect display means to perform a predetermined post-operation display effect after the operation means is operated within the operation effective period. When,
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to make the player more entertaining and further improve the game entertainment by performing the presentation using the operation means in a new manner.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the front view of the handle unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit from the left front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from upper right back, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from lower left back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the ball guide part in the lower plate, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows schematically the example provided with the ball guide part different from (a) in the lower plate. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the lower plate which can be divided | segmented, (b) is description which shows the state which expanded the storage area | region of the lower plate according to the magnitude | size of the space behind a production operation unit. FIG. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation button and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation button and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . FIG. 48A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the embodiment of the effect operation unit in FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line | wire in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line | wire in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit, and (b) was the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the main screen of the screen unit was turned forward, and (b) is the subscreen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) is an attempt to hide the second rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) In the state which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the subscreen turned to the front, it tried to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in Fig.82 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a dispensing device, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. It is the perspective view seen from the front which shows only the front structural member and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows only the front structural member and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the start port unit of the front unit from the front upper, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the start port unit from back lower. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit of the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of the front unit from the front top, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back, and (c) is the perspective which looked at the attacker unit from back and bottom. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the center combination of a front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board which shows a motion of the surface movable decoration body of the surface movable production | presentation unit in a center actor. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the back appearance decoration body of the back top movable production | presentation unit in a back unit in the 1st appearance position. The back upper decorative body of the back movable movable unit in the back unit is in the second appearance position, and the back lower front first decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body of the back lower front movable directive unit are in the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows. A pair of shutters are open with the first decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the first decoration of the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board showing the state of the appearance position of the back left protruding decorative body with the surface facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable production unit in the back unit, and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable production unit with the respective second decoration surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows a back right rotation decoration object of a back right movable production unit in a back unit, and a back left rotation decoration object of a back left movement production unit in the state where each 3rd decoration surface turned to the front. It is a front view of the game board showing a state where the back-under-bottom after-rotation decorative body of the back-under-back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated counterclockwise at the rising end position. In the back unit, the back and back rotating decorative body of the back and bottom movable effect unit is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front at the rising end position, and the back four corner second decorative body of the back and four corner movable effect unit is at the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back four corner 1st decoration body of the back four corner movable production | presentation unit in a back unit in the state of an appearance position. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and (b) is a flowchart of the main control board 1310. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence about the timer interruption control regularly performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special symbol process process (step S14). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 1st start port passage process (step S32). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 2nd starting port passage process (step S34). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 1st special symbol process process (step S38). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 1st special symbol normal process (step S80). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process (step S105). (A) is a jackpot determination table, and (B) is a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process (step S83). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 1st special symbol stop process (step S84). 4 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by a peripheral control unit mounted on the peripheral control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 16mS steady process performed for every 16mS in a sub main process. It is specified in the command analysis process (step S601) that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating that the reach (reach out of reach, per reach) is received when the high probability time-short state is controlled. It is a timing chart of the battle production performed with the game board side production display device in this case. It is specified in the command analysis process (step S601) that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating that the reach (reach out of reach, per reach) is received when the high probability time-short state is controlled. It is a timing chart of the battle production performed with the game board side production display device in this case. When the command analysis process (step S601) specifies that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating reach are received when the high probability time-short state is controlled, the game board side effect It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the battle effect performed with a display apparatus. When the command analysis process (step S601) specifies that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating reach are received when the high probability time-short state is controlled, the game board side effect It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the battle effect performed with a display apparatus. When the command analysis process (step S601) specifies that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating reach are received when the high probability time-short state is controlled, the game board side effect It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the battle effect performed with a display apparatus. FIG. 49 is a front view of the rendering operation unit 400. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-holds display in the display panel of a game board side effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the holding | maintenance change effect using the number-of-holding display in the display panel of the game board side effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of the pending | holding change effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of the pending | holding change effect of FIG. 10 is a time chart schematically showing a hold change effect, a change in the display color of the target hold image, and a display color of the hold image whose display position is to be changed as the hold memory is consumed. 155 is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control unit in connection with the hold storage as each process of the effect control process in step S602 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding number designation | designated command process which a peripheral control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding number designation | designated command process which a peripheral control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding change effect determination process which a periphery control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding change effect process which a periphery control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding image shift process which a periphery control part performs. It is a figure which shows each table, memory | storage area, and processing operation required in order that a peripheral control part may be related to pending | holding memory | storage, and may perform each process.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 10, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, and a through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is provided with a tray unit 320 attached to the lower portion of the front side below the player and the game state that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A stage operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory stage, and attached to the upper left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through-hole 111 above the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout apparatus 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout apparatus 830 downward. An upper full ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320, and a payout unit A normal guiding path 861 that is attached to the lower end of the base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5 a into which the game ball is to be shot and moves the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5 a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, and a flat gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out this game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size through which only one game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 vertically. And a discharge hole 74. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. In the horizontal portion 71, the discharge hole 74 is in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 protruding portions 32 and 42. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42 by screws screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface in the left-right direction of the lower frame member 20. .

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. A load from 622 to the front end surface of the lock member 66 is hardly applied. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. Handle unit 300, a pan unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150; a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111; and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 that are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 for sending a game ball to the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower tray 322 that can be stored, the upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and the balance of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning a cash or a prepaid card deducted from the ball lending from the ball lending machine, and a cash thrown into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents an effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that can be viewed from the player side in the operation button 410 and can display an effect image. Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the plate unit 320. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. This door frame right side unit 550 is provided at the front end with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides projecting greatly forward than the door frame left side unit 530. Right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front are projected forward from the door frame base 110 and The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through-opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed in the front lower right corner of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through-hole 111. Between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted in the vicinity of the right end in the front view and from the rear surface to the front. A cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrated forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front, and the entrance 251a and the ball exit 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. And a ball feed opening 115 for making it face.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates forward and rearward at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, and faces the ball outlet 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passing opening 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end when viewed from the front are adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door frame base 110 and face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The dish passage opening 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the hollow glass unit 190 is inserted from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and the upper left and right corners of the door frame base 110 , And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes left and right upper reinforcing metal plates 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and left and right middle reinforcing members attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 extending up and down attached along the front left side of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcing up and down attached along the right side of the door frame base 110 viewed from the front. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Accordingly, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a pair of projecting pieces 141a in the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a. A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame , And a lock spring 144 that biases the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into a door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 has a portion bent horizontally at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved generally downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it downward. Can do. Accordingly, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is inserted by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. A substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 include a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a that can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for attaching the glass unit 190 in a detachable manner. The glass unit mounting member 170 is a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is more outward than the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 becomes glass. The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protruding portion 172 protrudes from a disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, so that the gravity center position of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the projecting portion 172 when the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the protruding portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of the flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, three) protrusions 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided.

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. The axis 181 is tilted so as to extend rightward, and the handle unit can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right upper corners when viewed from the front, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is formed by inserting a locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by contacting the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a game ball (game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the crime prevention cover 200, and the game area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 thus removed is inserted into a security recessed portion 1008 of the front structural member 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular and flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213 c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 includes a mounting plate portion 213 c on the left side when viewed from the front and is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and a mounting plate portion 213 c on the right side when viewed from the front. Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 is inserted into 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213 a and the pair of cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 opened rearward.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as seen from the back. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 are supplied to the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 that has an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 251a and that is open at the rear, and a box that closes the rear end of the front cover 251 and is opened at the front A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 252 and the front cover 251 A partition portion 253a that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and that partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251 is provided. The ball extending member 253 and the axis extending vertically between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 are sent one by one to the hitting ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252. A ball feeding member 254 supported so as to be rotatable around and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 250 has a ball feeding member 254 disposed on the right side of the entrance 251a in front view, and a ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. A ball feeding solenoid 255 is arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b when viewed from the front, and this slit 251c. An operating rod 253c of a ball punching member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. The front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is located upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball removal guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323. The part opened to the rear on the end side is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removal member 253 includes a partition portion 253a that is divided below the entrance port 251a and between the entrance port 251a and the ball exit port 251b and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 254, and a ball of the partition portion 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 253b that is movably supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 253b, and a side below the actuation collar 253c from the side surface of the pivot collar 253b. A weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side of the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253 c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327 a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253. A sphere holding portion 254b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rotation axis to the rotation shaft core side, and a rod-like flange portion 254c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size that can hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing toward. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking unit 254a blocks the movement toward the ball holding unit 254b (hit ball supply port 252a) and stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange 254c side closes the hitting ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 250 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 256 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 256 swinging vertically. And a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 256 that moves up and down and extends in the left-right direction, and the side that engages the ball feed actuating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a. A shaft portion 257b that is disposed on the opposite side and is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252; and a ball feed member 254 that extends upward from the shaft portion 257b. A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center is provided.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 256 that is swung by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 so that the ball feed member 254 is moved. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is in a state where the tip of the ball feed solenoid 256 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is moved downward. Is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. . That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 254 is activated. Can be sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682 by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951.

  Further, the ball removing member 253 pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 250 is applied with a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 253d, but protrudes forward. Since the rotation of the actuating rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320, the ball removal member 253 is normally operated. The partition 253a partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  When the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a, and the operation transmission unit 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. The operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partition 253a Canceled. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320 and discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 327b formed with the action transmitting portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 contacts is urged upward by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c. Even if game balls are supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  The ball feeding unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A tamper-proof member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so as to be detachable from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece 261 that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece 262, and inclined portions 263 that are each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 facing each other. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260. Thereby, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250, and attached to the illegal game ball. When a fraudulent act is performed in which an illegal game ball is taken in and out of the first starting port by operating the string, the illegal game ball launched (hit) by the ball launcher 680 After the string attached to the game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, a V-shaped narrow portion formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 It is possible to cut by this, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full sphere receiving port 274 that opens toward the rear at the lower right side of the front sphere passage 273 and the through-sphere passage 273 and communicates with the full guide passage 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 274 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball opened to the front near the lower right corner of the front view and received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are moved forward. And a ball discharge port 276 that communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the tray unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a wide area, a plate-shaped movable piece 278 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 that biases the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the dish unit 320 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280 by the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and can be urged to eliminate the filling of the lower plate 322.

  The foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 with which the operation protrusion 863e of 863 can contact is provided (see FIG. 111). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream end (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the game ball in the upper plate 321. It is.

  The handle unit 300 includes a handle base 301 that is attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 302 that is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and a handle that covers the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end, and a rotatable attachment by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 on the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, and a handle base 301 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 in front view. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304 A single button 311 that is rotatably mounted around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the case 301, and a single button operation sensor 312 that is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. Yes.

  A handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 includes a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b protruding in a radial direction from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a hollow from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Accordingly, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from an inner position with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. A locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first protrusion 302a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front portion of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 302a that protrudes most clockwise by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Slightly low. The second protrusion 302b bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 302b bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the counter-tick that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  In the third protrusion 302c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 302c is inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and more gently than the side face in the counterclockwise direction where the side face in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 away from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a that have a round front center and bulge forward and project rearward. The three attachment bosses 303a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 through the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the attachment boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the attachment boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is positioned rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 682 in the hit ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The driving of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be shot. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 by some method without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. I can't do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the single button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single button 311, and the firing control unit (illustrated) of the payout control board 951 is shown. Is omitted), the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. This makes it possible to temporarily stop the playing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and to release the single button 311 before operating the single button 311 by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 311. The game ball can be driven again into the game area 5a with strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is most rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball is driven most strongly into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated is the fourth protrusion 302d. Therefore, by changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the “right-handed” position in an easy state. It is possible to reduce a person's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in games.

[3-3. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41A is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit disassembled for each main member and is seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The dish unit 320 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400 described later is attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320.

  The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored.

  The dish unit 320 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 323, and the left side of the dish unit base bulges forward greatly from the left and right center. An upper plate body 324 that forms an upper plate 321, and a lower plate body 325 that is attached to the left side of the left and right center at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward to form a lower plate 322. And a dish unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325.

  Further, the dish unit 320 includes an upper dish ball removal button 327 that is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so that it can be pressed from above on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front, and a front view of the upper dish ball removal button 327. A ball rental button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the ball rental button 328, and a ball rental button 328 The ball rental return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the return button 329 and the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper dish 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and projecting forward from the front of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. And it has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Top plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front and is opened upward. Has been. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 321 moves from the most bulged part to the right in the front view, the front end retreats backward, and a guide passage part 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. Yes. The entire upper surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is positioned below the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d. It is inclined so as to be lowered toward a position slightly below the diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface thereof is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which a later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to contact the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding metal 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), so that the game ball Charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower dish 322 is disposed below the upper dish 321 and on the left side of the center of the dish unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower tray 322 is formed in a container shape that can store game balls, and is attached to a lower tray ball removal hole 322a that vertically penetrates the bottom wall so that the game balls can be discharged, and the tray unit cover 326. And an escape portion 322b for avoiding contact with the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open of the lower plate main body 325. A dish unit base 323 that is closed at the rear, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of the portion of the lower dish body 325 that projects into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view extends to the left and right, and a trapezoid in which the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. Are curved so that the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending obliquely are recessed backward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases in the plan view from the front to the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 and the like, the lower dish main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from an outer peripheral end excluding a rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. A lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle and the upper side shorter than the bottom side are arranged on the front side and the left and right sides extending obliquely are recessed backward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall 325b rises upward from the bottom wall 325a at a height that is two to five times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower dish main body 325, the curved portion at the front right front corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the upper right half of the lower plate body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover upright wall portion 340a that rises upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower platen main body 325, and an approximately upper end of the cover upright wall portion 340a. A ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion from a part of the front side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. Further, the front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling part 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower dish cover part 326k of the dish unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the escape portion 322b. Yes.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (the production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end of the front end side of the front end side that extends short to the left and right, and more than half of the production operation unit 400 in the front view. Located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half wraps around the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326, which will be described later, and a lower plate. Lower pan second area A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d on the right side (the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower tray cover 340). Area). In other words, the lower dish 322 is more than half of the storage area that can store the game balls (corresponding to the storage area in plan view, and the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2). It is located behind the rendering operation unit 400.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c that forms the rear wall is open to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 includes the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It arrange | positions at the lower plate | pan 2nd area | region A2 used as the back of the side. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower tray ball supply port 323c is not visible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Accordingly, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to bend toward the rear of the production operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) bulging forward. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower dish 322 is formed so that the lower dish second area A2 is larger than the lower dish first area A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  In the lower plate 322, the right half in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) of the lower plate main body 325 protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 as shown in FIG. The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that projects into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower dish 322 includes a lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower dish 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lid member 334 that is operated by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the normal state, the lower dish 322 has a lower dish ball removal hole 322 a closed by a lid member 334, so that a game ball can be stored in the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the game balls in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 332b to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is disposed in front of (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the dish unit base 323 that forms the rear wall of the lower dish 322. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400. It is invisible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a front side of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed, and the bottom surface has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward Therefore, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball hole 322a is opened are directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Immediately it is discharged downward from the opened lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since the lower end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball supply hole 322a is opened in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the left side region of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball discharge hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. The ball comes into contact with the portion forming the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball hole 322a without going to the region on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is formed. In a state in which is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is immediately inserted into the region on the left side of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is kept open, the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, so that they are paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that game balls and the like are directly discharged to the dollar box can be made to make it difficult for the game balls to feel annoying through the lower plate 322, thereby allowing the player to play a game (game ball driving operation). And a production image, etc.), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are separated, but the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Moreover, although the cover standing wall part 340a of the lower dish cover 340 has shown the example which stood up from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish main body 325, the bottom wall part 325a of the lower dish main body 325 showed the bottom plate cover 340's The cover standing wall 340a may rise. Moreover, although the ceiling part 340b of the lower tray cover 340 showed the example extended substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall part 340a, the ceiling part 340b of the lower dish cover 340 is shown in the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish main body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the example provided with the escape part 322b for avoiding the contact with the production operation unit 400 (2nd production operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 was shown, the escape part 322b is not provided. A lower plate 322 may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform surface shape without a through-hole, but a plurality of through holes through which game balls cannot pass are shown. It may have a perforated hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It is good also as what was formed in the thing and net shape. It should be noted that a light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) so that the interior of the lower dish 322 is illuminated (light-emitting decorated) through a fence-like or net-like gap of the lower dish 322. .

  In this embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by combining these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. What is integrated, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 In which the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit. That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
With reference to FIG. 46, an embodiment in which the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 is provided with a ball guiding portion that guides a game ball from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a will be described. FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  The example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a in the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. A pair of sphere guiding portions 322c are provided that are separated from each other by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) that extends back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. The lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Accordingly, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are guided to the lower dish ball extraction holes 322a by the pair of ball guide parts 322c without getting over the ball guide parts 322c, and the lower dish balls It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  The lower plate 322 in this example is similar to the above in that the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball are located on the rear side (lower plate second region A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The hole 322a is arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower dish cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without entering the left side area of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. And since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance that passes through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of the game ball, a production image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest Can do.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guide portion 322c is rail-shaped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Any material that can be guided to the dishball hole 322a may be used.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (b), the game ball released diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. In addition to being formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, a buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also provided with a lower plate ball hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) through the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball released to the right front from the lower dish ball supply port 323c is reflected toward the lower dish ball hole 322a by the buffer 322d and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and reflects, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above (the production operation unit 400 that is the lower plate second area A2 and the production operation in the plate unit cover 326). The unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340 are disposed behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 so that they cannot be seen from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d can be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Accordingly, when game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the bag is also discharged directly to the dollar box. By making it difficult to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, production image, etc.) and suppress the decrease in interest Can be made.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (c), the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the bottom surface (bottom wall) of the lower plate 322 is interposed, and the lower plate 322 is moved upward from a portion opposite to the lower plate ball supply port 323c. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball that has jumped over the lower dish ball removal hole 322a toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material which forms the lower plate 322, and may use the buffer material which relieves the collision sound at the time of reflection, such as rubber | gum and a foam. The return portion 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may constitute a part of the side wall of the lower plate 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 Behind the opening 326d on the right side (the rear side of the covering wall on the front end side of the stage operation unit 400, the stage operation unit mounting part 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game balls flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a jump over the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a, the return plate 322e causes the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a side to And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing shown. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2.

  First, the lower dish main body 325 (lower dish 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2, and has a lower dish ball removal hole 322a. A main body part 325A and a first extension part 325B that is attached to the right side of the main body part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B further includes the remaining space (the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A) of the installation space 326j in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is accommodated, as compared with the main body unit 325A. Projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. In addition, the first extension part 325B is formed with an escape part 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A at the right front corner.

  Next, in the example of FIG. 47 (b), the rear end of the production operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and the production operation unit 400 of the production operation unit 400 is larger than the example of FIG. 47 (a). The rear space (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wide. And the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (b) constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball hole 322a. A main body part 325A and a second extension part 325C that is attached to the right side of the main body part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2 are larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the second extension part 325C has a constant lateral width from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension part 325B.

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communication), and the storage area of the game balls Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be divided, and at least one of the divided members can be replaced. The storage area can be increased or decreased as necessary. Further, since the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) can be divided, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes behind (in the installation space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower dish second area A2 behind the effect operating unit 400 (second effect operating unit 400A). You may arrange | position on the boundary line of dish 1st area | region A1 and lower dish 2nd area | region A2, and may arrange | position in lower dish 1st area | region A1.

  In the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball punching hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are provided. You may make it provide the lower dish ball | bowl hole 322a.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower dish main body 325. However, the game ball is placed on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the lower plate body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided in the same manner as the lower plate body 325, or can be divided into the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened). It is formed in a shallow box shape.

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth at the lower side of the upper dish ball supply port 323a and the upper dish ball supply port 323a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating back and forth in the lower left portion from the left and right center in front view and extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear, The upper plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d that penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate body 324.

  In addition, the tray unit base 323 has a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding the game ball sent to the rear side of the tray unit base 323 through the upper dish ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guiding path 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to become lower toward the right side surface of the lower dish ball supply port 323c when viewed from the front, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball removal guide path 323f for guiding the released game ball to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a left side of the front view of the ball feed guide path 323e, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball removal guide path 323f An operation transmitting portion 327a that is penetrating back and forth at a height between the two and is in contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and operated by the upper dish ball removing button 327 protrudes so as to face rearward. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opened in a cylindrical portion of the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

  Furthermore, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and the handle insertion port 326f through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the front and rear near the right corner when viewed from the front. And a cylinder insertion port 326g through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper tray ball supply port 323a of the tray unit base 323 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 321, and the cylindrical rear end is the upper tray passage port for the door frame base 110. 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through-ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game ball paid out from the payout unit 800 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens in the rear wall of the lower plate 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower tray passage port 116 from the front side of the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 is connected. Thereby, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower tray ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) of the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, and the like. Thus, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 and 42. The dish unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and opens largely forward in the center in the left-right direction and to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached, and on both left and right sides of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. A dish front upper decoration part 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper dish 321 and a dish front lower decoration part 326c formed on the lower side of the left and right dish front decoration part 326b are provided. Yes.

  The production operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed with a size of about 1/3 in the horizontal direction with respect to the full width in the horizontal direction of the dish unit 320, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320. It is formed at a height. In addition, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so as to move backward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front front decoration part 326b moves rearward as it goes from the horizontal direction center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward both left and right sides. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions. The upper front decorative portion 326b is inclined so that the lower end moves upward from the horizontal center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the horizontal center side of the plate unit cover 326 ( It is formed so that the vertical direction is narrowed from the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a side) toward the left and right ends. In the dish unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper front dish portion 326b on the left side when viewed from the front.

  The front front side of the dish front decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center side of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the both left and right sides. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the intermediate portion is recessed backward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions.

  A lower dish opening 326d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the front lower dish portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower dish 322 faces forward from the lower dish opening 326d. In the lower front dish portion 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, a lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower dish opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower dish opening 326d in the front lower dish part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state where it is assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The front lower dish portion 326c on the right side when viewed from the front has a handle insertion port 326f that passes through the front and rear at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g that penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f in the vicinity of the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted is formed.

  The dish unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate part 326h extending from the upper end of the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the right side when viewed from the front to the front end of the dish unit base 323, and the top plate part 326h allows Covers the upper right side. The top plate ball removal button 327, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate part 326 i that extends from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative part 326 c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The bottom side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is cut out at a portion located below the lower plate 322, and the portion is closed by a lower plate ball removal base 335 described later.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a mounting space 326j that opens forward at the site of the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a and into which the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). In addition, the dish unit cover 326 includes a lower dish cover part 326k that extends rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower dish opening 326d and covers the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover part 326k comes into contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall 325b in the lower plate body 325 at the left end, and the left end of the ceiling part 340b in the lower plate cover 340 comes into contact with the right end. Yes.

[3-3e. Top plate ball removal button]
The upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper dish ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front, and the game ball in the upper dish 321 is moved to the lower dish 322 by pressing. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear edge side of the upper side of the top plate part 326h is shifted to the left and right by a ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top part 326h of the dish unit cover 326. It is attached rotatably about an axis extending in the direction. The upper end of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball removal lever that extends vertically. The ball removal lever is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball removal button 327.

  The ball removal lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the ball removal button 327 is in contact with the upper part of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b that is slidably mounted by the dish unit base 323 from above. . The upper dish ball removal slider 327b includes an operation transmission part 327a that protrudes rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission part 327a is connected to the opening 323g in the dish unit base 323. It protrudes rearward so as to face, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b is biased upward by an upper dish ball removal spring 327c. The upper dish ball removal spring 327c biases the upper dish ball removal spring 327c via the ball removal slider 327b and the ball removal lever. A ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c, the operation transmission part 327a of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmission part 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320, and discharged to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  When the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, thereby making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoying through the lower plate 322. It is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of game balls, effect images, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball rental button, return button, and ball rental return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are, as shown in the figure, on the right side of the top dish ball removal button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 in the circular decoration. Installed on.

  The ball lending button 328 is used to insert a predetermined number of game balls into the ball lending machine (not shown) placed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 by inserting a cash or prepaid card and pressing it. The unit 320 is lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 321. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state where the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after subtracting the rented game balls.

  Although not shown, the ball rental return display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED disposed below the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or An error code or the like when the ball lending machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end of the dish unit cover 326 near the effect operation unit attachment part 326a in the front dish upper decoration part 326b on the left side when viewed from the front. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex pointing leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided to the player in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. On the other hand, when an effect image prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and a desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3h. Bottom dish ball removal button]
The lower dish ball removal button 333 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. The lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the front lower end of the front dish lower decorative part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, below the lower dish opening 326d in the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be discharged below the tray unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower dish ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is disposed on the left side with respect to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The lower plate ball removal base 335 is attached to the bottom plate portion 326i so as to close a portion of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 that is located below the lower plate 322 and is cut out. The lower dish ball removal base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a penetrating vertically in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 322a at a position directly below the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322. . Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is disposed between the lower dish body 325 and the lower dish ball removal base 335. Accordingly, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower dish ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 335 so as to be rotatable around a position on the left side of the lower dish ball removal button 333 in plan view. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322 a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower dish ball removal base 335. As a result, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates about the vertically extending axis, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown, the lower dish ball removal base 335 includes a holding device that holds the lower dish ball removal button 333 when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower dish ball removal button. A lower dish ball spring for biasing 333 forward is attached. When the lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened by moving, and the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains pressed backward. In this state, even if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is maintained open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward while the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower dish ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, a game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition to the pressing operation of the lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box disposed below the plate unit 320, the dollar box can be operated via the lower plate 322 only by operating the upper plate ball removal button 327. Can be discharged, and the labor involved in ball removal can be simplified. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48A, and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 400 is attached to the front part in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the dish unit 320, and can be pressed by the player and can also provide a production image to the player. It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The base unit 430 is attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer periphery and a spherical shape so that the center side bulges forward, and an annular button frame attached to the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. 412 and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth spherical shape with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in a state assembled to the operation button 410. Longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411 b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is clearly visible and has contents.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that protrude rearward in a band shape and penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. A plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the main body 413a to the front, the front end being the inner surface of the button lens 411 And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  Six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration 611b of the button lens 611 and the frame opening 612a of the button frame 612. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a spherical shape and is formed to be transparent, so that the display screen of the door frame side effect display device disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front. . The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decoration board unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is button-based. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, operation button right inner decoration board 434, operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and operation button lower inner decoration of the base unit 430. Light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423b and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416b, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. It is equipped with. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. Thereby, the front end side of the flange part 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can contact | abut on the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening part 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LED 422a and 423b and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 is substantially entirely metal except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and each of the second LED 422b and 423ab mounted on the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed so that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b in the button base 413. It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the assembled state in the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder part 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation buttons 410 are attached so as to be able to advance and retreat.

  The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has four through holes 431a penetrating in a substantially square shape extending vertically in the center portion, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through hole 431a. A ring-shaped unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button decorative member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through-hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431, and which extends in a short tube shape in the front-rear direction; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, respectively. The operations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Each of the three press detection sensors 440 that are attached to the 439 and detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth in the center, and is formed with a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through hole 431a is sized to fit within the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right outside the through hole 431a. These holding holes 431b are formed so that the inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. Thus, it is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. In addition, the upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  Further, the unit base 431 has a light shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from between a portion to which the operation button upper inner decorative substrate 435 is attached and a portion to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper front portion. It has. The light shielding wall 431c allows the frame top lens 418 to be decorated with light emission only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a that extends short in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that passes through the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that are attached to the unit base 431.

  The peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and includes a plurality of first button inner decorative portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape and extending in an odd octagonal shape centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b A plurality of second button interior decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second button interior decoration portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The operation button inner decorative member 432 is not clearly visible behind the lens due to the lens effect of the first button inner decorative portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are each mounted with a plurality of LEDs. By making it emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be decorated with light emission. By decorating the operation button interior decoration member 432 with light emission, the inside of the operation button 410 or the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be light emission decorated.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting these LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light emission.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are respectively full color LEDs. It is said that. The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 have a white front surface. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 is a guide boss whose rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b and whose front end protrudes rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled in the production operation unit 400. It abuts on the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Specifically, three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three press detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three press detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the right side of the through hole 431a in the rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The production operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, operation button lower inner decoration board 436, frame top lens decoration board 437, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 and the door frame base unit 100 for relaying the connection to the door body relay board. Is.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear portion of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 has a bottom surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and a bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck downward, until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the frame unit 415 The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 being bent downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted downward, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are controlled. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the center portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 having a bottomed rectangular tube shape. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 has an outer periphery formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape comes into contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In a state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled in the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 passes through the through hole 431 a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button interior decoration member 432. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and faces forward from an opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  Door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from peripheral control board 1510 in liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away so as to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a production | presentation operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that is changed when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the game. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, there is a gap between the lower surface of the leg part 442 a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate part 326 i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. Thereby, the production operation unit 400 moves so that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a spherical shape moves upward at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the plate unit 320 (the production operation unit 400). Since the game board 5 is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be attached to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a spherical shape in the operation button 410, the portion protruding forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is the center of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It protrudes forward from the opening 416a (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in a normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a spherical shape is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. When the distant position is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and allowing the operation button 410 to move straight back. Therefore, any position on the front side of the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved backward with the operation button 410 tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 can be pressed. You can fully enjoy the production.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the production operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), the player who presses the operation button 410 can be prevented. Strong vibrations can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted downward, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are controlled. It is possible to avoid an unreasonable force acting on 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a spherical shape protruding forward, and thus has higher strength and rigidity than a flat plate. In addition, even when struck strongly, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the effect operation unit 400 includes a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button interior decoration member 432 made of transparent members. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  The effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and thus the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a is positioned, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is moved from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a positioned in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the operation button decoration member 432 can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden from view. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the production operation unit 400 can be improved.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the concave and convex lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave and convex lines of the second button decorative portion 432g intersect as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, if the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are formed of a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In addition, in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. From the lower side of the unit base 431 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached, a flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light emission.

[3-4g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Operation Effect Unit]
Next, the second rendering operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the rendering operation unit 400, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit that is different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second rendering operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and an effect of the dish unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The second base unit 450 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The second base unit 450 is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect table that can be displayed and display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, In addition, the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer periphery and a spherical shape so that the center side bulges forward, and an annular button attached to the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. A frame 412 and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the button frame 412 are provided, and are substantially the same as the operation buttons 410 of the rendering operation unit 400. It is the composition.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 are different from the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the part 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex toward the center of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. And a button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern in which a plurality of rows of triangles and a triangle having one apex toward the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference. A right triangle pattern comprising a bottom side facing the center side, a side extending from both ends of the base side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base side And a hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, a side extending from the center of the truss-like triangle base to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle pattern, and a tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in the polyhedron shape. Thereby, since the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth spherical body shape, the back surface side is formed in a polyhedron shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so the first button decoration portion 411a. In this part, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner, and the light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Accordingly, at the site of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear opened. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second presentation operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the presentation operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71, and the like. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415, as well as the rendering operation. The unit 400 can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative board unit 420 of the second presentation operation unit 400A has the same configuration as that of the decoration board unit 420 of the presentation operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and will not be described in detail.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is

  The second base unit 450 includes a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451. Column-shaped button shafts 452 that are slidably inserted from each other, and the operation button springs through which the four button shafts 452 are inserted and the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410 are urged forward. (Not shown) and three press detection sensors 454 that are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation buttons 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b that protrudes hemispherically from the inner periphery of the main body 451a to the rear, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that passes through the cover portion 451b in the front-rear direction with a substantially quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface of the main body portion 451a to the rear, and a main body portion 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e that is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxially with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body portion 451a. The lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed (U-shaped) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery that are substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed to have a size that can be accommodated without contacting when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f. Yes. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from behind.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the upper, lower, left and right corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. These holding holes 451d have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and can be inserted into the guide boss portion 413c. In these four holding holes 451d, a button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 410c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached to be slidable in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 410c. Can do.

  Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper left holding hole 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper right holding hole 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. .

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451d, and the front end of these operation button springs comes into contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, whereby the operation button springs are operated via the guide boss portion 413c. 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open frontward and extends rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc shape are coaxially located. The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f are inserted into the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

  The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 has their respective front surfaces passing through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed in such a manner that it is separated in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulates the rotation range of the screen unit 470 when the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Yes. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restriction portions 451g.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the magnet is each embed | buried in a pair of rotation control part 451g, and it contact | abuts to the rotation control part 451g by magnetizing with the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b. The stopper 475b is difficult to be separated from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Accordingly, the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the sub-screen 472 is directed forward with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the position states, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to be rotated by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like is suppressed, and the door frame second The effect image by the two effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three press detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, three pressing detection sensors 454 are left on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are respectively attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three press detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, and the second base unit 451A. An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front portion of the unit 450 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and attached to the lower front portion of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  Further, the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A rotates the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and the cover unit 451 b of the second base unit 450. The projector 500 that is disposed and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and the projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 that is open at the front, and is mounted so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 at the top of the second base unit 450. Upper cover 506 and upper part And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and when the effect image is projected from the projector, The effect image can be displayed (projected display) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 that is milky white and translucent, and a disc shape with one end of the main screen 471 in the axial direction as a part of the outer periphery. A sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, milky white and translucent, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the working gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475a formed over substantially the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A transparent sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74, FIG. 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen A sub-screen decoration board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the sub-screen 472 attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen 472 on the opposite side of the main screen 471 A semicircular arc-shaped decorative member 478 that extends short from the end of the main screen toward the central axis of the main screen.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length that is approximately 4/3 times the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are edged by the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decorative member 478.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and includes a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction, and an inner side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a is closed. And a curved screen portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472 b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the circumferential ends of the gear teeth 475a and the gear teeth 475a. And a detecting piece 475c protruding in a flat plate shape from the opposite side to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the upper bearing member 480 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is like that.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position where the main screen 471 is directed forward and a second position where the sub screen 472 is directed forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472 b in the sub screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull with a transparent member, and the thickness of the sub-screen decoration member 476 is changed in a complicated manner. It has become difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the sub screen decoration member 476 in the shape of a skull.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be decorated with light emission. More specifically, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits the LED 477a so that the “eye” portion of the skull and the “PUSH” character portion can be strongly illuminated.

  In addition, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not include a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen 472 and the LED 477a is caused to emit light. The player can recognize the point light source of the LED 477a. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 on the sub-screen 472.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of quadrangular pyramid irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc as in the peripheral decorative portion 472a. .

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are configured to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are opened forward in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. Further, the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The concave portion of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in 470 is inserted and disposed, and the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. Due to the concave portion 481a that is recessed in an arc shape, the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 can be favorably rotated between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface side, and is positioned behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. Thus, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can drive the screen unit 470 to rotate. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 and having a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 attached to the lower surface of the unit case 491 and having a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and is meshable with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

  In the state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 so that the screen unit 470 extends forward and backward through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is disposed in a hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 through a projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector main body 501 attached to a projector attachment member, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a columnar shape and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover portion 451b through the through-hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Mounted on.

  The projector 500 can project effect images over substantially the front surfaces of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display still images and moving images as effect images. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector, and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second rendering operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in front view.

[3-4g-5f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper part of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470, and are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions that are separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position and the second position where the sub screen 472 is in the front. The time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. Based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507, the rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and reduces the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, so that the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320 is provided. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. A buffer base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that contacts the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg pieces that protrude downward from the left and right ends of the main body portion 512a when viewed from the front and extend in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg piece portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  In the buffer unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430A compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510. Move downwards. The shock is absorbed by compressing the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 further moves downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 contacts the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the buffer base 512. Since the main body portion 512a has a gap formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a. When 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-like main body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are absorbed. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Effects of the second stage operation unit]
The operational effects of the second performance operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub view of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state where the screen turned to the front. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit with the main screen facing forward, as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button 410 according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in 410 and the player can be entertained, and the player can be operated by operating the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second rendering operation unit 400 </ b> A has an overall height substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the second rendering operation unit 400A is attached to the tray unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is between the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. A gap is formed. That is, the second rendering operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part with respect to the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is installed to become. As a result, the second rendering operation unit 400A moves forward with the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a spherical shape at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes. As a result, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as possible as the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 are slid on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be in the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring. The frame main body 416 is in contact with a portion in the vicinity of the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has a central side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the front from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a spherical shape in the operation button 410, the portion protruding forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is the center of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It protrudes forward from the opening 416a (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the base unit 430A, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a spherical shape is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, while the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a spherical shape in which a part (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. When a position away from the center is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 can move straight back. Therefore, any position on the front side of the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved backward with the operation button 410 tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 can be pressed. You can fully enjoy the production.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part. As a result, the entire second performance operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and vibrations can be transmitted to the player who is touching the second performance operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (near the upper part of the operation button 410), strong vibration is applied to the player who presses the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body portion 512 a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326 i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck down, the impact is caused in multiple stages by elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511, bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512, or the like. Can be absorbed, and it can be avoided that an excessive force acts on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second rendering operation unit 400A or the like is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is not performed. Since the button 410, the second performance operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress the lowering of the player's interest, and to make the damage difficult. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a spherical shape protruding forward, the strength and rigidity are higher than in the case of a flat plate shape, Even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness, such as 411a and the 2nd button decoration part 411b, can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (refer FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is the inside of the button lens 411 by the uneven decoration combined with the triangle. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device There is a gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 of 460A, but the outer periphery (outside) of the screen unit 470 from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It is possible to make it difficult to see the gap. Accordingly, even if the operation button 410 capable of being pressed is provided with the door frame side second effect display device 460A whose position is fixed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. Can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Can be better.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, and the second effect display unit 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like that are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the top and bottom outside of the main screen 471, the left outside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right of the peripheral decorative member 478 The outer part (the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 76). ) Is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It is possible to hide, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension, the second performance operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

  In the first position where the main screen 471 is facing forward, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 and the like, the screen part 472b of the sub-screen 472. In addition, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the upper shaft member 473, and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the main screen 471 being rotatable, etc., so that when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, A movement exceeding the player's expectation is performed in the button 410, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the second position where the sub-screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are moved by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) can rotate, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. The player can be entertained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a center side from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display that is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a that is a combination of a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range and that is disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. The apparatus 460A includes a peripheral decoration portion 472a and a peripheral decoration member 478 of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged. Thereby, the decoration (first button decoration part 411a) made of a triangle arranged on the front side and the decoration made of a quadrangle arranged on the rear side (the peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) overlap each other so as to intersect. As a result, the player can show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration part 411a mainly composed of a triangle, the peripheral decoration part 472a mainly composed of a quadrangle, and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. As the position moves, the overlapping state changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap can be changed and the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the three-dimensional decoration with a depth can be displayed to the player. Can be shown to the player and entertain the player.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 so that the main screen 471 is directed forward, or the sub screen. 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration composed of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction and extend vertically. It is possible to show the player a geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row cuts the decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape in the button lens 411. . On the other hand, in the state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration part 472a is in an annularly extending state, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps the decoration made of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape in the button lens 411. Accordingly, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the decoration change, The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance, etc., and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A provides a screen unit 470 having a screen with a different switchable form on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410, and an effect on the screen unit 470. Since the projector 500 for projecting and displaying an image is provided, it is possible to display an effect image that is completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to entertain the player with a strong impact. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a sub-screen 472 having a disc-shaped relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 in the center, and the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. A rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis is provided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position, the center axis of the semi-cylindrical shape is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction. When viewed, it appears as a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74A). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and is translucent milky white. The effect image projected from the front side can be viewed through the main screen 471. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Accordingly, the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, whereas the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. It can be recognized that it is different from the above, and the player can be surprised, the player can be noticed on the main screen 471, and the entertainment image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the disc-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 A sub-screen decoration member 476 that imitates a skull appears in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472. By the way, a flat and non-transparent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, so that the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. As a result, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected onto the center of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75B). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, if the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration board 477 is caused to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be illuminated and decorated by the light, and the sub-screen provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be decorated with light emission. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light, it is possible to make the shadow of the sub-screen decoration board 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light while the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, and produces an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, the effect image is displayed on the portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on the outer portion of the sub-screen decoration member 476 made of a decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decoration member 476 that is the inside of the sub-screen is decorated with light emission by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outer side of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decoration effect different from the light emitting decoration of the decoration member in the past pachinko machine is given. The player can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player. At the same time, the player can be strongly focused on the sub-screen 472. In this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, and thus a partially high-brightness effect image that cannot be achieved by a conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and an effect image that makes the player more enjoyable can be displayed.

  In this way, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Therefore, the player can show decoration with a movement and a three-dimensional feeling, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decoration board 477 having the LED 277a mounted on the front surface behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily decorated with the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400 is provided with the operation button left outer decoration on the decorative board unit 420 behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a of the board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the first LED 422a, 423a emits light so that the six second button decoration parts 411b of the operation button 410 emit light. Can be decorated. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is arranged on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, and the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame By emitting the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. An effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and an effect that cannot be achieved by a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (changes) can be presented to the player. , You can entertain the player with a strong impact.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 78C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 is located on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a band plate-like left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531 A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 that protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534 and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 are covered. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and rear in the front surface. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are provided from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned at a substantially vertical center when assembled in the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening portion 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square having a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening portion 531a. A lens portion 532b. The door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. By this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be irradiated forward in the form of dots. With the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflector 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflector 532c at the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and a mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It swells in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. Further, the front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed in a saw-like shape in which the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a peak portion between the grooves is pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines dividing in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Almost all can be led to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In other words, the light beam is reflected so as to diffuse in the direction of the light and travels in the rectangular lens portion 532b from the center side toward the outside along the front surface thereof. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b decreases as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 81). As a result, the light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusing lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the rectangular lens portion 532b. It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front diffusing lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion formed at the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. And a multi-sided decoration part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends forward and backward. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-surface decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-surface decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative part forward from the square lens part 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by light emitted from the circular decorative part 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 to the front. Each light is illuminated and decorated.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending forward and backward. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface of the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the center in the vertical direction at the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, The upper part of the unit-shaped decorative base 535 is bent back so that the upper part is bent backward, and the lower end of the upper character-like part is connected to the upper end of the lower character-like part. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decoration cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 82C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 86A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82A, and FIG. 86B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82A. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 attached to the front side of the door frame, and a transparent flat plate attached to the front side of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extending in the vertical and forward / backward directions. Of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and the right unit left decorative member 554 A transparent flat right unit left cover 55 attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side. It has a, and.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a right diffuser and a right unit left diffusing lens from the front center of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusing lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the up-down and front-rear direction, and a sheet attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and decorated. A right unit right decorative member 557 that is shaped like a transparent plate, and a right unit right cover that has a transparent flat plate shape and is attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and is a shallow box shape extending in the up / down and front / rear directions with the front and right sides open. And the non-translucent right unit left shading member 559 and the non-translucent side mounted to close the open right side of the right unit left shading member 559 on the left side of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. And a flat right unit right light shielding member 560.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape whose front view is elongated vertically, and is formed in a box shape in which the center portion in the front-rear direction is closed, extending in a rectangular tube shape short in the front-rear direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed with white on both front and rear sides. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. 86. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 553a is moved to the right from the rear end side toward the front, as shown in FIG. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes to the front larger than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. In the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 553e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that light from the left LED 552a spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 553e is within the main body portion 553a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically on the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front. Light irradiated from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side by the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. Thus, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit left decorative member 554 is visible. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as a manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo in accordance with a concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. A portion 556b, a plurality of cutout portions 556c that are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right, and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; An accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decoration member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. And a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is in the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. 86. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move leftward as viewed from the rear end side toward the front. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  A plurality of notches 556 c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552 c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. That is, the plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a rectangular opening that penetrates forward and backward through the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The accommodation recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e is such that the peak portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically on the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front, so that the door frame right side The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a (right) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate the light to the right with more uniform light. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a when viewed from the front (side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decorative member 557 is transparent. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends from the right surface to the right and is rearward. A plurality of flat plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle extending vertically is cut obliquely in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward. The outer shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is substantially the same shape as the main body portions 553a and 556a.

  The rear wall 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right side from the substantially horizontal center of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. That is, the plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a pair of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 in the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light shielding member 560 can close the right side opening of the right unit left light shielding member 559 which is formed in a shallow box shape to the right side when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. .

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. 86. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the respective main body portions 559a and 560a are connected to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. Accordingly, the main body portions 559a and 560a are separated from each other in the left-right direction, and form a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. Through the space formed between the main body portions 559a and 560a, the light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is irradiated to the rear side of the right unit decorative lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552B, and Only the middle LED 552c can be decorated.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each divided space because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 can prevent light from interfering with each other, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four parts by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, the multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, It is formed so that only the multi-face decoration portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. This makes it possible for a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 to have the illusion that he is playing in a private room, and allows the player to play in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can do.

  Moreover, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall installed with the pachinko machine 1 side by side, The pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as a ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides emit light in a unique manner. By decorating the game hall staff, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect, and it is possible to quickly respond to the defect, so that the player can interrupt the game. The problem can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. 87 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 574 has a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and is disposed on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 having translucency and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 are closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 574 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 574 The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side of each of the top right decorative lens member 580. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 574, and LEDs are respectively mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plural (three) light guide members 578. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 574 are penetrated. A pair of board bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door frame top which is attached to the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Middle left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top middle right decorative A pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the substrate 587, and a.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the lower part in the vicinity of both left and right sides of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 574 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right sides, and about a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. The trapezoid protruding forward and the quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Therefore, the unit main body 574 has a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 574 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion projecting forward. It is located rearward (recessed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending leftward and rightward at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, in a portion extending obliquely from the portion protruding in a trapezoidal shape forward in the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending diagonally on the front surface of the unit main body 574 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. In addition, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  The unit main body 574 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out squarely from the rear end to the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d that is cut from the rear end in the left-right direction on the lower surface to the front. It is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f that extend vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface thereof is positioned forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends outward from the upper end of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has a front surface behind the top middle decorative member 576 in such a state that the front middle decorative board 577 is inclined to move downward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the top middle decoration member 576 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on the left and right sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit main body 574. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 is described as an end side, and the side close to the center as a center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a and a circular arc portion 578b extending in a circular arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end of the straight portion 578a toward the central side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevennesses formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends of the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the part located in front of the circular arc part 578b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided, and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the assembled state in the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left side. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. The portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 that is positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is connected to the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically. The substrate base 585 includes a substantially square side wall having sides extending in the vertical and front and back directions, a rear wall having a rectangular shape in front view extending rightward and leftward from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a substantially right triangle connecting the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 574 such that the opened portion is closed by the unit main body 574. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side to the left of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. It is done. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. Inclined state. Thereby, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. It is done. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 are formed on the right side. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the rear side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically by a light-impermeable member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in correspondence with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. Partitioning. By this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after the respective light guide members 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member can be guided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated satisfactorily.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative substrate 577, a door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curled backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at the left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in a good state, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decorative by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the through-holes 111 penetrating through the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the front and rear directions and in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The height in the vertical direction of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is made smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 400 having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower part of the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides is recessed so as to bend backward (the front ends of the left and right ends of the plate unit 320, and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400) Rather than a straight line connecting the two, the front surface on both the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concavely curved shape). As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and shown to the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 includes the operation button 410 having a large diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the dish unit 320 and bulging forward, the short distance of the player's hand when the operation button 410 is operated. Thus, any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the operation button 410 can be “fast pressed” relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410 having a large diameter and bulging forward is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation button 410 can be operated satisfactorily or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Because the lower plate 322 underneath is inconspicuous, it can make it easier for players who are familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that they are clearly different, and appeal to the players strongly. A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the production operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is opened on the left side of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be secured in the lower plate 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the production operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. Compared to this, it can be recognized by tactile sense that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322, and a bottom for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d in the front view (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400). That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the door frame 3 has a lower dish ball removal hole 322a disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c (directly in front) in the lower dish 322, the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and operated. Assuming that the lower dish ball hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the upper dish 321 and the like to the lower dish 322 are immediately discharged from the lower dish ball hole 322a to the lower dollar box and the like when entering the lower dish 322. Will be. At this time, since the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box is also included. I can't see it. Accordingly, the player can have an illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 or the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full is directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, and to reduce the interest by dedicating the player to the game (gaming operation of the game ball, production image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a disposed at the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 standing on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the dishball hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dishball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly removed. It can be guided to the hole 322a or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thereby, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 is an area on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without intruding into the lower tray 322, the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 is displayed below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without showing the player. Can be discharged, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game Entertainers and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-like and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition with a pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. The game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without bothering other players around you.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be light-decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, so that the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be informed from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576, A shape that is recessed so as to squeeze backward (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of 576 are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized. The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Thereby, since the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, the pair of upper speakers 573 become inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine is given. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized by the player at a glance, and the player can enjoy a high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111. , Because it protrudes forward in the center in the left and right direction, it can show the player a unified decoration up and down so that the virtual line passing through the center in the left and right direction is conspicuous, and by the decoration of sophisticated feeling The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion port 605 that passes through the front and rear and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and a door of the board unit 900 that passes through the front and rear from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and the lower side. A connecting opening 606 that faces the frame relay board 911 forward, and a circular shape that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side of the game board placement part 602 when viewed from the front, and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. A speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided. The main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  The main body frame base 600 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and to be pivotable to a position slightly lower on the left side from the center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge main body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The rear part of the plate-like plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates the lower hinge second main body 643 and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 up and down, and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 is passed through. The door frame hinge hole 644 for supporting the shaft and the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend upward from the left end on the rear side, and the door frame 3 And a regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range.

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and downward behind the portion extending rightward from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the tray unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the strength of the game ball is changed in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hit ball 683 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the game ball that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 270 to the foul ball receiving port 275, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and latchable with the outer frame 2, and projecting in a columnar shape from the bottom of the unit base 701 to the front, A protrusion protrudes from the front end portion in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door according to the rotation direction of the key. A key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame collar 702 or the outer frame collar 703.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101A is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Q-Q in FIG. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an illustration showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the back. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full sphere path unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the upper side of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The tank tank 802 stores a game ball supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that hangs down from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and that pays out the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Normal guidance path 861 that guides the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, guides the game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e to the front of the door frame 3 from the front end. The full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged on the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 penetrate the front case 821 and the rear case 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case and the rear case, respectively. The ball breakage detection sensor 827 is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center of the bottom side so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. The detection portion 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821e with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is opened at a position to the right of the bottom center of the bottom side so that the game ball can pass through. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection unit 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). In addition, when the movable piece member rear 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and back by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows before and after (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dust, etc., and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be rotated favorably by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member 825 or the movable piece member 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c. The Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball and shorten the time when the game is interrupted as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to weight attachment portions 825e, 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member rear part 826 are moved according to their own weight and weight weight. The lower end side of 825a, 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passage 822c and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c Or the like does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, the weight is not affected even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are rotated frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e) are not detached from each other, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. . Moreover, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost associated with the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c are provided with an introduction portion 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c protrude to the inside. As the game ball flows in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
A payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. It has a box shape with the front side open, a payout entrance 832a that is open so that a game ball can pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and a game ball near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. There is a possible payout path 832d, and a rear box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e that branches from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 having an end passing through the front box 831 and attached to the rear box 832, a shaft member 838 passing through the shaft member 838 and rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Discharge vanes 839 that are disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotate integrally with the driven gear 837, and blade rotation detection sensors 840 that are attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detect the rotation of the discharge vanes 839. And.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the dispensing path 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing path 832 d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b, payout passages 831 d and 832 d, and a ball discharge passage 831e and 832e are pivotally attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a portion where the ball extraction passage 831e and 832e can be closed. A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably attached to the upper part of the right side of the box 832 in a front view so that the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated or cannot be rotated; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing vanes 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attachment portion 831g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge passage 832e further extends a portion of the discharge passage 832d that obliquely extends from the discharge inlet 832a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. That is, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved back and forth between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-like gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The discharge vane 839 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. The plurality of (three) front blades 839b and the front blades 839b from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 839c, and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the base cylinder portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the position closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere receiving portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c) Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball housing portion 839e).

  With the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout vanes 839 are disposed in portions that are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front case 821 and the rear box 832 in the payout passages 831d and 832d. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the entire height of the front case 821 and the rear box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in a circular arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 95). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 abuts the outer periphery of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d, from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, respectively, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper portion of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a that is bent in a square shape, and a protruding portion 843c A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 105) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 hits the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. Touching. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 94 (b)). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 381e and 832e by the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state where the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, a game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state over a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through from the left and right center to the left when viewed from the front, and the right and left from the center when viewed from the front and from the center. Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front and opened downward. The upper full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b is It is located directly under the ball outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full sphere path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball-out guide path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and released downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game ball stored on the upper side of the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and becomes full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full sphere path unit 850 automatically drops the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game balls from the front end to the through-ball path 273 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and moves on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the center right end in the front-rear direction. And a lower ball extraction guide path 865 for discharging to the bottom.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a obliquely to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and that can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860 is a through ball passage 273, a full tank receiving port 274, and a door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are positioned in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding are not performed. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, thereby operating the door frame 3. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111B). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. The through-ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are penetrated from the side. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has more game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of game balls through the foul cover unit 270 to the lower plate 322 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 321, the foul cover unit 270 is not able to supply the game balls to the lower plate 322. A game ball is stored in the storage passage 277. When the movable piece 278 is rotated by the storage of the game ball in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full of game balls. And the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 with respect to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In such a state, it is possible to fill the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full sphere path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in conventional pachinko machines, so that in a gaming state in which many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are released by the game balls being paid out. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and have fun.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. An interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and that houses a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls. A box 950.

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front face of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. This door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left front. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from behind. Further, FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure. FIG. 120 is a perspective view seen from the front showing only the front constituent member and the game panel in the game board, and FIG. 121 is a perspective view seen from the rear showing only the front constituent member and the game panel in the game board.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 5 according to the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the 1100 so as to be visible from the front side, a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a front surface of the game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 to be attached and a back unit 3000 to be attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open are different from the plurality of general winning holes 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a game ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received in accordance with the normal lottery result lottered and the first lot selected by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 In accordance with the special lottery result or the second special lottery result, there is provided a lower major prize opening 2005 and an upper major prize opening 2006 that allow the reception of game balls.

  In addition, a starter unit 2100 having a first starter port 2002 that is attached immediately above the out port 1151 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and an inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starter port unit 2100 when viewed from the front. A side unit 2200 having a plurality of general winning ports 2001 and a right general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, and a second starting port that are mounted to the right of the starting port unit 2100. 2004 and an attacker unit 2300 having a lower prize-winning opening 2005, and a frame shape having an upper prize-winning opening 2006 attached above the starter opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300. The center role 2500 is provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-shaped back box 3010 that is open at the front, and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so that the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached. A lower left ball passage unit 3030 attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010, and a right lower ball passage unit 3040 attached near the lower right front end of the back box 3010. Yes.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board 3060 attached to the rear side of the opening 3010a on the rear face of the back box 3010, a lamp drive board cover 3061 covering the back of the lamp drive board 3060, and the back box 3010. A motor drive board 3062 attached below the opening 3010a in the rear view on the rear surface, a motor drive board cover 3063 covering the back of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear face on the rear box 3010 attached to the lower left corner in the rear view. Panel relay substrate 3064.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 attached along the upper and left sides at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back movable production unit attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a back bottom front movable effect unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010a in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable effect attached in the back box 3010 to the right of the opening 3010a. The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 Moveable directing unit 3500 after the back, and the movable back directing unit 3100 within the back box 3010 and moveable after the back A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided. The stop portion 1006 functions as a buffer member that relaxes and softens the momentum of the game ball that is driven into the game area 5a, and is formed of rubber or the like in this example. The material of the stopper 1006 is not limited to rubber as long as it functions as a buffer member.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 has an out-port 1151 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the gaming area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 (see FIGS. 120 and 121 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 so as to be detachable from the rear side. The panel holder 1120 has a plurality of attachment holes and positioning holes for attaching the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  In a state where the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1151 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5 a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding unit 1003, and can be discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1151 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 87) can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board (not shown) for controlling game contents and game ball payout, a main control board box 1320 that houses the payout control board 951 and is attached to the board holder 1200, It has.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized actions on the main control board is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs to display a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 has two status indicators that display a gaming status and a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball to the gate portion described later. A lottery was drawn by accepting a game symbol in the first starting port, which will be described later, and a normal symbol display device consisting of LEDs, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate part A first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special retention number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the reception of game balls to the first starting port; , A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving a game ball at the second starting port, which will be described later, and a game ball accepting person at the second starting port When the second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, etc. And a round indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the open / close pattern is repeated (number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Central LCD display]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000.
More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color display device using white LEDs as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the game board side effect display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and the right projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. A fixed piece 1602. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism, and the lock mechanism is moved downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of game board side effect display device 1600. Although not shown, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls the peripheral control board 1510 for controlling the presentation presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board, and the effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the display of the image, a ROM substrate having a ROM storing a production image, a production sound, a production control program, and the like; And a peripheral control board box 1520 that accommodates.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 128. 122 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the starter unit of the front unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the starter unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit as seen from the front side, and FIG. 125 (b) is a perspective view of the side unit as seen from behind. Further, FIG. 126 (a) is a front perspective view of the front unit of the attacker unit, (b) is a rear perspective view of the attacker unit, and (c) is the lower back of the attacker unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the center unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as seen from the back.

  The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 The lower special winning opening 2005 and the upper large winning opening 2006 are provided that allow game balls to be received either in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality (four here) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1151 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged on the right side in the game area 5a from the center in the vertical direction to the lower side. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate portion 2003. The lower prize winning opening 2005 is arranged near the lower end portion in the game area 5a below the second start opening 2004. The upper prize winning opening 2006 is disposed above the second start opening 2004 and in the vicinity of the upper end in the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached immediately above the out port 1151 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a left side of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front. The side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality (three in this case) of general winning ports 2001, and is attached to the right side of the starting port unit 2100, and one general winning is received. An attacker unit 2300 having a port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second start port 2004, and a lower prize-winning port 2005, and is mounted above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a big prize opening 2006.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1151 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002.

  The start port unit 2100 includes a unit base 2101 attached to the panel plate 1110, a ball receiving member 2102 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 2101 and protruding forward to form a first start port 2002, A box-shaped front decoration base 2103 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2101 below the ball receiving member 2102 and protrudes forward and extends left and right, and the front surface of the unit base 2101 in the front decoration base 2103 And a front center decorative substrate 2104 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  Further, the start port unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the front decoration base 2103 and has a front decoration member 2105 that has a predetermined decoration and is lit and decorated by the front center decoration board 2104, and the rear side of the unit base 2101. And a guide passage member 2106 for guiding the game ball received in the first start opening 2002 downward, and a game ball attached to the guide passage member 2106 and received in the first start opening 2002 are detected. A first start port sensor 2107.

  The ball receiving member 2102 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear, and can receive a game ball from above as the first start port 2002 and guide it backward. The front decoration base 2103 extends evenly to the left and right around the ball receiving member 2102 (first start port 2002), and is inclined so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the left and right ends. The front decoration member 2105 extends left and right, and has a fake portion 2105a formed in a plate shape with substantially the same size and shape as a lower large prize opening door member 2352 that opens and closes a lower big prize opening 2005 described later. ing. By this fake part 2105a, the player can have an illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening 2002.

[Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. 125 and the like. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and is attached to the vicinity of the upper edge of the lower portion of the front surface of the unit base 2201. The two first ball receiving members 2202 projecting forward and forming a general winning opening 2001, and attached to the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 2201, and projecting forward to the general winning opening A second ball receiving member 2203 forming 2001, a side decorative substrate 2204 disposed behind the unit base 2201 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the side decorative substrate 2204 so as to cover from the rear. A board cover 2205 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2201.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left in front view. In addition, the unit base 2201 has a first shelf 2201a that is inclined leftward and lower to the left and above the part where the second ball receiving member 2203 is attached, It has a projecting portion 2201b projecting to the back. The unit base 2201 has translucency and is decorated with light emission by the side decorative substrate 2204.

The first ball receiving member 2202 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear, and can receive a game ball from above as a general winning opening 2001 and can guide it backward.
The second ball receiving member 2203 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and has a second shelf 2203 a that is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right on the upper surface, and a lower portion of the second shelf 2203 a. And a ball receiving portion 2203b that opens to the upper left side and forms a general winning opening 2001.

  The substrate cover 2205 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front open, and is opened upward to a portion that is behind the ball receiving portion 2203b of the two first ball receiving members 2202 and the second ball receiving member 2203. And has a bowl-shaped guiding portion 2205a for guiding the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the board cover 2205 is inserted into the opening 1112. It can be guided to the rear of the plate 1110.

[Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The attacker unit 2300 is disposed in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2300 has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a lower large winning port 2005. Specifically, the second start opening 2004 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and the gate portion 2003 is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. A lower prize winning port 2005 is arranged below the second starting port 2004. The lower grand prize winning port 2005 extends to the left and right from the position immediately below the second start opening 2004 to the left beyond the position directly below the general winning hole 2001.

  The attacker unit 2300 has a general winning opening 2001 and a gate part 2003, and is attached to the panel base plate 1110 from the front and a unit base 2301 attached to the front upper part of the unit base 2301. The front opening member 2302 to be decorated, the shelf member 2303 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2301 between the front opening member 2302 and the lower prize winning port 2005 and projects forward, and the unit base 2301 A ball guide member 2304 for guiding a game ball received on the second start port 2004, which is attached to the rear side, and a gate sensor 2305, which is attached to the unit base 2301 and detects the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, It is equipped with.

  Further, the attacker unit 2300 is disposed at a portion corresponding to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and between the front opening member 2302 and the shelf member 2303, and a lower attacker decorative board 2306 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A substrate cover 2307 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 so as to cover the back of the lower attacker decorative board 2306, and a grid frame-shaped light shield attached between the lower attacker decorative board 2306 and the unit base 2301. And a member (not shown).

  Also, the attacker unit 2300 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and is provided with a second starting port unit 2320 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and is connected to the lower prize winning port 2005. And a lower large prize opening unit 2350 that opens and closes.

  The unit base 2301 has a gate portion 2003 protruding forward from the upper end portion, and one general winning port 2001 protruding forward from a lower left portion of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front. Further, the unit base 2301 includes a bowl-shaped bowl portion 2301a that guides a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward. This unit base 2301 has translucency.

  The start port front member 2302 is so formed as to rise toward the left from the pair of side wall portions 2302a extending forward along the left and right sides of the second start port 2004 and the upper end of the left side wall portion 2302a in front view. An extending guiding portion 2302b, a flat outer wall portion 2302c extending forward from a side wall portion 2302a on the right side when viewed from the front and extending to the right, and a pair of side wall portions 2302a, the guiding portion 2302b and a flat front plate portion 2302d connecting the front ends of the outer wall portion 2302c. The left end of the guiding portion 2302b extends further to the left than the gate portion 2003.

  The shelf member 2303 has an upper surface extending from a position immediately below the right side wall portion 2302a of the start port front member 2302 to a position immediately below the center of the left and right of the general winning opening 2001 so that the left end is lowered. As a result, when a game ball rolls on the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 and is released from the left end when the lower major prize opening 2005 is in the open state, it is accepted into the lower major prize opening 2005 with a very high probability. The ball guide member 2304 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2307. In addition, the ball guiding member 2304 passes the game ball received in the second start port 2004 between the second start port unit 2320 and the lower large prize port unit 2350 behind the unit base 2301. It is formed so as to be discharged downward after being guided rearward from the unit 2350.

  The second start port unit 2320 includes a front case 2321 having a second start port 2004 opened at the front end and attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301, and a rear case 2322 attached to the rear side of the front case 2321. After the second start port door member 2323 and the second start port door member 2323 are slid forward and backward, the front case 2321 is supported so as to be able to slide forward and backward so as to protrude forward from the second start port 2004. A start opening solenoid 2324 attached in the case 2322 and a second start opening sensor 2325 which is attached so as to be sandwiched between the front case 2321 and the rear case 2322 and detects a game ball received in the second start opening 2004. And.

  In the state where the second starter unit 2320 is assembled to the attacker unit 2300, the front end of the front case 2321 passes through the unit base 2301 from the rear side and is positioned substantially on the same plane as the front surface of the unit case 2301. Thereby, the 2nd starting port 2004 is opened toward the front. In a normal state where the start port solenoid 2324 is not energized, the second start port door member 2323 is immersed in the front case 2321, and the game ball flowing down in front of the second start port 2004 is the second start port. Without entering 2004, it passes down the second starting port 2001 and flows downward. On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 2324 is energized, the second start port door member 2323 projects forward from the second start port 2004. In this state, when a game ball flows down in front of the second start port 2004, the game ball comes into contact with the second start port door member 2323 and the flow direction changes from the lower side to the rear side. Accepted. The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2325 and then guided to the ball guiding member 2304 and discharged downward.

  The lower major prize opening unit 2350 is a unit case 2351 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and that has a rectangular lower major prize opening 2005 that is open to the left and right on the front, and the lower major prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A horizontally-long rectangular plate-like lower prize-winning door member 2352 that is pivotally attached to 2351, and a lower-large prize-winning door member 2352 that is attached inside the unit case 2351 and is driven to open and close depending on the gaming state. Lower large prize opening solenoid 2353, a lower large prize opening sensor 2354 that is attached to the unit case 2351 and detects a game ball received in the lower large prize opening 2005, and is attached to the lower surface of the unit case 2351 on the upper surface. Lower large prize opening decoration board 2355 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and lower large prize opening solenoid 235 Includes inferior vena winning hole sensors 2354, starting opening the solenoid 2324, and a second start hole sensor 2325 or the like, the attacker unit relay board 2356 relaying the connection between the main control board, the.

  The lower university winning opening 2005 is open forward. The lower big prize opening door member 2352 capable of opening and closing the lower big prize opening 2005 is attached so that the left and right ends of the lower side can be rotated by the unit case 2351, and the upper side moves so as to move forward and downward. By doing so, the lower prize winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

  In the lower prize winning unit 2350, the lower prize winning door member 2352 stands upright and closes the lower prize winning port 2005 in a normal state where the lower prize winning solenoid 2353 is not energized. When the lower big prize opening solenoid 2353 is energized according to the gaming state, the lower big prize opening door member 2352 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. That is, the lower big prize opening door member 2352 is inclined so as to become higher from the lower side of the lower big prize opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the lower prize winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the lower prize winning opening door member 2352, the inclination of the lower prize winning opening door member 2352 changes the flow direction from below to the rear. It will be accepted into the Shimodai prize opening 2005. The game balls received in the lower major prize opening 2005 are detected by the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 and then discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2351.

[Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 127 and 128. In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the game board side effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 can be viewed from the front through the frame. The center accessory 2500 has an upper prize winning opening 2006 that allows a game ball to be received according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, the center accessory 2500 has a part of the lower side extending downward between the start port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 to the vicinity of the lower right rail 1004. That is, the center accessory 2500 divides the game area 5a to the left and right.

  The center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2511 and a flat frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the opening portion 1112 that is largely open at the center of the panel plate 1110 A frame-shaped center base having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that prevents entry of game balls into the cage frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 1112. 2510.

  The front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. The position of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 that is slightly to the left from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side is the highest.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 enters a warp inlet 2520 in which the game ball in the game area 5a is open on the outer peripheral surface of the lower left side when viewed from the front on the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510, and the warp inlet 2520. The warp passage 2521 for guiding the game ball to the vicinity of the left end in front of the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510, the warp outlet 2523 opened so that the game ball can pass at the downstream end of the warp passage 2521, A stage 2530 that allows the game ball released from the ball to roll, extends to the left and right along the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510, and discharges the supplied game ball into the game area 5a. ing.

  The stage 2530 is curved such that the left and right ends are high and the left and right sides of the portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest, and the space between the lowest portions is bulged to be slightly higher. Yes. This stage 2530 is formed in a portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and is formed in a center guide groove 2531 cut out from the front end to the rear and two lowest portions, respectively. And a fan-shaped side guide groove 2532 that decreases toward the left and expands to the left and right. In the assembled state of the game board 5, the first starting port 2002 is located immediately below the central guide groove 2531, and the game balls released from the central guide groove 2531 into the game area 5a are first with a very high probability. It is received in the start port 2002.

  In addition, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the right end portion of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 in front view and is guided to roll the game ball bounced back in contact with the stopper portion 1006 toward the upper game space 2541 described later. Part 2540. The guide portion 2540 is formed as a member different from the center accessory 2500 and is attached to the center accessory 2500 to extend the right end portion in front view of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 in the right direction in front view. In addition, the guide portion 2540 is formed of a resin having a stronger strength than the center accessory 2500. Specifically, the center accessory 2500 is formed of a PC resin (polycarbonate resin), while the guide portion 2540 is formed of a POM resin (polyacetal resin) that is more durable than the PC resin.

  As described above, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a come into contact with the stop portion 1006, the game balls loosen their momentum, but some of the game balls are moved by the stop portion 1006 to the front peripheral wall of the center accessory 2500. It is rebounded in the upper side direction of the portion 2512. In addition, since most players turn the handle 302 to the maximum in order to bring the game ball into contact with the stop portion 1006, the game ball is thrown into the first start port 2002. It is stronger than normal games aimed at. Then, when the game ball hit in this way is bounced back by the stop portion 1006, the center accessory 2500 may be damaged due to frequent drops on the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. For this reason, the right end portion in front view of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is attached to the center accessory 2540 as a separate guide portion 2540 and is formed of a highly durable POM resin to prevent the center accessory 2540 from being damaged. ing. In this example, not all the center actors 2540 are formed of POM resin, but only the guide portion 2540 is formed of POM resin. Therefore, even if the guide portion 2540 is damaged, only the guide portion 2540 is replaced. Can be repaired easily, and can be easily repaired in the event of breakage.

  In addition, a guide portion 2540 described later is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to have a step with the front peripheral wall portion 2512. In this example, it is attached so that the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is above the upper side of the guide portion 2540 in front view. As a result, when the game ball bounced back by the stopper 1006 reaches this step, it is returned to the upper game space 2541 without exceeding the step. In addition, the friction coefficient of the upper side of the guide portion 2540 is low due to the smooth mirror finish, and the game ball that could not exceed the step between the front peripheral wall portion 2512 and the guide portion 2540 is quickly flowed down to the upper game space 2541. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging due to the game ball staying on the upper side of the guide portion 2540.

  Further, in this example, the upper side of the guide portion 2540 is formed by a three-dimensional member that is longer than the right side (left and right sides). The upper side of the guide portion 2540 requires a certain length to receive the game ball bounced back by the hitting portion 1006, but the space in the game area 5a can be made by making the upper side and the right side (left and right sides) comparable. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine decreases. Therefore, by forming the right side (left and right sides) of the guiding portion 2540 shorter than the upper side, a space in the up and down direction of the game area 5a is secured so as not to reduce the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

  The center accessory 2500 is sandwiched between the guiding portion 2540 and the stop portion 1006, and an upper right entrance where the game balls in the game area 5a are open to be able to enter, and an upper side of the center base 2510 below the upper right entrance. The upper game space 2541 having a predetermined size with the upper prize winning opening 2006 opened on the left side when viewed from the front, and the right edge of the center base 2510 from the right end when viewed from the front at the bottom of the upper game space 2541 A right passage 2542 in which the lower end is bent to the left and the game ball can circulate, and a lower right exit 2543 that opens downward at the lower end of the right passage 2542 is provided. .

  The upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the upper portion extends upward. The upper game space 2541 is formed in such a size that the game ball can sufficiently move in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. In the upper game space 2541, an upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened to the left of the front view from the upper right entrance. In addition, the upper game space 2541 has a guide portion 2541a that is inclined immediately below the upper right entrance so as to become lower toward the right in front view. By this guide portion 2541a, the game ball that has fallen through the upper right entrance is rolled along the bottom surface of the upper game space 2541 without jumping up in the upper game space 2541 and smoothly guided to the right passage 2542. Can be made.

  The right passage 2542 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2542a extending in the left and right directions on the front and rear wall surfaces alternately in the vertical direction. Can be attenuated. The lower right exit 2543 is opened immediately above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted between the lower right exit 2543 and the gate portion 2003 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110).

  Further, the center accessory 2500 has an upper prize port door member 2550 that closes the upper prize port 2006, and an upper prize port solenoid 2551 that opens and closes the upper prize port door member 2550 according to the gaming state. An upper prize winning hole sensor 2552 for detecting a game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006, and a rear guide path 2553 for guiding the game ball detected by the upper prize winning hole sensor 2552 to the rear of the flange portion 2511; A rear outlet 2554 that is open at the rear end of the rear guiding path 2553 and through which the game ball can pass; and a branching from the middle of the rear guiding path 2553; And a discharge passage 2555 that opens to the lower end of the escape passage.

  The upper prize-winning door member 2550 opens and closes the upper prize-winning hole 2006 that opens to the left in front of the upper right entrance in the upper game space 2541. The upper prize-winning door member 2550 is attached to the lower end to the left of the upper right entrance so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth in the vicinity of the bottom surface of the upper game space 2541. It extends to the ceiling of the upper game space. The upper prize winning opening door member 2550 stands upright in a normal state, and closes the upper prize winning opening 2006. Then, when the upper prize winning solenoid 2551 is energized according to the gaming state, the upper prize opening 2006 is rotated so that the upper end moves to the right when viewed from the front and the game ball can be received. Open. In this state, the upper end of the upper grand prize opening door member 2550 is higher than the lower end and is located further to the right in front view than the upper right entrance. Accordingly, the game ball that has passed through the upper right entrance and dropped onto the upper prize winning door member 2550 is guided by the upper prize winning door member 2550 and accepted into the upper prize winning port 2006.

  The game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 is detected by the upper prize winning opening sensor 2552 disposed at the lower left of the upper prize winning opening door member 2550, and then is behind the flange portion 2551 by the rear guiding path 2553. Be guided. The rear discharge port 2554 that is open at the rear end of the rear guide path 2553 is usually defined by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is closed. Accordingly, when the game ball is not released from the rear discharge port 2554, the game ball enters the escape passage 2555 branched immediately before the rear release port 2554, and is discharged downward from the discharge port 2556 through the escape passage 2555. .

  The center accessory 2500 includes a front movable effect unit 2560 attached to the upper side of the center base 2510 and a lower movable effect unit 2570 attached to the lower side of the center base 2510. The front movable production unit 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is mounted in a frame of the center base 2510 so as to be movable up and down, and has a front movable decoration body 2561 that is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, A front movable decorative body decorative board (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the upper movable decorative body 2561 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and in a gaming state And an upper surface driving motor 2563 that moves the upper surface movable decorative body 2561 up and down.

  The front and lower movable effect unit 2570 is attached to a portion extending downward from the stage 2530 on the lower side of the center base 2510, and has a translucent front surface with a decoration on the front surface. The lower decorative body 2571, the first rotational decorative body 2572, the second rotational decorative body 2573, and the third rotational decorative body 2574 that are rotatably attached to the front of the front and lower decorative bodies 2571, and the center base 2510 A lower drive motor 2575 that is attached to the side and rotates the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 according to the gaming state, and the rear side of the lower decorative body 2571 And a front and lower movable decorative body decoration board 2576 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  In the lower movable production unit 2570, the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 are formed in a shape imitating a shuriken. , Each rotating in the same direction.

[Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 to 132. FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit after disassembling the back unit, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the rear after disassembling the main unit. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600 and a game ball that is attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010 and received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided downward. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 that discharges onto the substrate holder 1200, and the game ball that is attached near the lower right front end of the back box 3010 and is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and the upper winning hole 2006 are received. The outlet 330 of the back lower right base 3303 in the back right / left movable effect unit 3300 described later. a lower right ball passage unit 3040 that guides the game ball discharged from a and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 2556 of the escape passage 2555 of the center object 2500 downward and releases it onto the substrate holder 1200; And a general winning opening sensor 3050 which is attached to the passage unit 3030 and the lower right ball passage unit 3040 and detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and drives the decorative boards based on the control commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A lamp driving board cover 3061 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the driving board 3060 and a rear surface of the back box 3010 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a as viewed from the rear side. A motor drive board 3062 for driving each drive motor based on the control command, a motor drive board cover 3063 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the back of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear surface of the back box 3010 Installed in the lower left corner of the rear view, with the main control board, each winning port sensor, each winning port solenoid, etc. It includes a panel relay board 3064 relaying the connection, a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 attached along the upper and left sides at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back movable production unit attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a back bottom front movable effect unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010a in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable effect attached in the back box 3010 to the right of the opening 3010a. The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 Moveable directing unit 3500 after the back, and the movable back directing unit 3100 within the back box 3010 and moveable after the back A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The back box 3010 has a box shape with a front opening and a square opening through the rear wall, and a frame-shaped liquid crystal attachment projecting in a flat plate shape with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. Part 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside on the right side in the rear view of the liquid crystal attachment part 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal attachment part 3010b And a cutout portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the back.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100.

  The back box 3010 is not described in detail, but a boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[Lower left ball passage unit]
Next, the lower left sphere passage unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 129 to 132 and the like. The lower left sphere passage unit 3030 is attached to a portion corresponding to the rear of the side unit 2200 in the back box 3010. The lower left sphere passage unit 3030 is formed in an L shape in which the side of the front view shape extending vertically is shorter than the side extending left and right, and the inside is formed hollow. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is provided with three entrances 3031 that are open forward on the front surface and through which game balls can pass. These three entrances 3031 are formed at positions corresponding to the three guide portions 2205 a in the side unit 2200.

  The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is inclined so that the hollow interior is lowered toward the right when viewed from the front. The A general winning opening sensor 3050 is attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030, and a game ball that has entered inside from the entrance 3031 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030.

[Lower right ball passage unit]
Next, the lower right sphere passage unit 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 129 to 132 and the like. This lower right sphere passage unit 3040 is attached to a portion of the back box 3010 corresponding to the rear of the attacker unit 2300. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is open toward the front, a first entrance 3041 through which a game ball received in the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 can enter, and a back right movable effect unit 3300 described later. A second advancement entrance 3042 that opens upward just below the discharge port 3303a that opens on the lower surface of the first entrance, and a center that is open upward to the right and in front of the second entrance 3042. And a third entrance 3043 through which the game ball discharged from the discharge port 2556 through the escape passage 2555 of the accessory 2500 can enter.

  The lower right ball passage unit 3040 discharges the game balls that have entered the first advance entrance 3041, the second advance entrance 3042, and the third advance entrance 3043 downward through independent passages. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3050 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first entrance 3041. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

[Back edge decoration unit]
Next, the back periphery decoration unit 3080 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The back periphery decoration unit 3080 is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front end of the back box 3010 at portions corresponding to the upper side, the left side, and the lower left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The back periphery decoration unit 3080 is attached to the rear periphery decoration member 3081 having translucency extending in a C-shape and the back periphery decoration member 3081, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A back periphery decorative substrate 3082 and a substrate cover 3083 that covers the back of the back periphery decorative substrate 3082 and is attached to the rear side of the back periphery decorative member 3081.

  The back periphery decoration unit 3080 can light-decorate the back periphery decoration member 3081 by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back periphery decoration substrate 3082 to emit light. Further, in the assembled state of the game board 5, the front surface of the back peripheral decoration member 3081 can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent panel board 1110, and the outside of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is decorated.

[Moving effects on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 141. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the upper movable decoration body of the upper movable effect unit in the center role. FIG. 134 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the back upper decoration body of the back movable stage production unit in the back unit is in the first appearance position, and FIG. 135 is a back decoration of the back side movable production unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board in which the body is in the second appearance position, and the back bottom front first decorative body and the back bottom front second decorative body of the back bottom front movable effect unit are in the appearance position.

  In addition, FIG. 136 shows that the pair of shutters are open with the first decorative surface of the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the back left rotation effect unit of the back left movable effect unit rotates. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position of the back left protrusion decoration object in the state where the first decoration surface of the decoration object was directed forward. Further, FIG. 137 shows a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with their second decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG. FIG. 138 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit with their third decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG.

  Further, FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-under-bottom rotating decorative body of the back-under-back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated counterclockwise at the rising end position. Further, FIG. 140 shows the rear back and rear rotating decorative body of the rear back movable movable effect unit in the back unit rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front at the rising end position, and the back four corner second of the back four corner movable motion effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of a decoration body appearance position. FIG. 141 is a front view of the game board showing the back four corner first decorative body of the back four corner movable effect unit in the back unit in the appearance position.

  As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, in the game board 5, the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 disposed behind through the frame of the center accessory 2500 is good from the player side in a normal state. Can be visually recognized. In the normal state, the upper movable ornament 2561 of the upper movable effect unit 2560 in the center accessory 2500 is raised, and the first rotary ornament 2572 and the second rotary ornament of the lower movable effect unit 2570. The body 2573 and the third rotating decorative body 2574 are stopped from rotating. Furthermore, in a normal state, the back upper decoration body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is positioned at a retreat position on the upper rear side from the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a state where the top and bottom are reversed, and a part thereof It is in a state where it protrudes downward from the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 and can be visually recognized from the player side.

  Further, in a normal state, the back bottom front first decorative body 3209 and the back bottom front second decorative body 3212 of the front back front movable effect production unit 3200 are visible from the player side behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It is located in a difficult retreat position. Further, in a normal state, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 and the back left movable effect unit 3400 are respectively forward (front) of the first decorative surfaces 3310a and 3410a. Further, the pair of shutters 3312 of the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 are closed, and the two back-left protruding decoration bodies 3421 of the back-left rotation decoration body 3410 are the back-left rotation decoration. The body 3410 is located at a retracted position that is invisible.

  Furthermore, in a normal state, the back bottom back rotating decoration body 3568 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 is located at the lower end position, and a part can be seen from the lower side of the center accessory 2500 so that it can be seen from the player side. It faces the frame. Further, in a normal state, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 of the back four corner movable effect production unit 3600 are from within the frame of the center accessory 2500 that is difficult to see from the player side. Is also located in the outward retracted position.

  This game board 5 is displayed on the table according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by accepting game balls from the normal state at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Movable production unit 2560, front and lower movable production unit 2570, back upper movable production unit 3100, back lower front movable production unit 3200, back right movable production unit 3300, back left movable production unit 3400, back lower rear movable production unit 3500, and The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 performs a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the upper movable effect unit 2560 of the center accessory 2500, the upper movable decoration body 2561 is lowered from the normal position by the rotational drive of the upper drive motor 2563, and the game board side effect display device It is located at the upper front of 1600 (see FIG. 133). Accordingly, the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 is covered with the front movable decoration body 2561, so that the player can think that the gaming state is changed, and the expectation for the game is increased. Can be raised.

  Further, in the lower and upper movable effect unit 2570 of the center accessory 2500, the first rotating decorative body 2572, the second rotating decorative body 2573, and the third rotating decorative body 2574 are rotated by the back lower drive motor 2575 ( (See FIG. 127 (b)). Thereby, it can be made to think that there is something good for a player, and the expectation with respect to a game can be raised.

  Further, in the back movable production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back top decorative body 3152 is lowered from the retracted position to the first appearance position by the rotational drive of the back top drive motor 3103 with the top and bottom reversed ( (See FIG. 134). In this state, the pair of openings 3152a of the backside decorative body 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a are partially visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. it can. As a result, the predetermined character deceived by the back decorative body 3152 looks upside down from above, so that the player can be surprised and entertained by the appearance of the character. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games. In this state, when the back upper auxiliary decoration body 3157 is reciprocated left and right by the rotational drive of the upper back auxiliary drive motor 3159, the pupil (sub decoration 3157a) of a predetermined character being deceived by the upper upper decoration body 3152 ) Will sway left and right, which can surprise the player and entertain the movable performance.

  Further, in the backside movable effect unit 3100, the backside decorative body 3152 is further moved to the lower second appearance position by the rotational driving of the backside drive motor 3103 while the backside decorative body 3152 is in the first appearance position. (See FIG. 135). When the backside decorative body 3152 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the top and bottom of the predetermined character being deceived by the backtop decorative body 3152 is reversed, and the top and bottom is in a normal state. Since it descends while rotating, the movement of the back upper decoration body 3152 becomes a dynamic movement, which can attract the player's interest strongly and can greatly surprise the player.

  In the state where the back decorative body 3152 is in the second appearance position, as shown in the drawing, the top and bottom of the predetermined character being deceived by the back top decorative body 3152 is in a normal state, and the back decorative body 3152 is It is located approximately in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500. Thereby, the back decorative body 3152 becomes conspicuous in the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and it can be greatly anticipated that an advantageous gaming state will occur to the player. . Even in the state of the second appearance position, the rotation of the back side auxiliary drive motor 3159 can turn the eyes of the predetermined character that is being deceived by the back side decoration body 3152 to the left and right, making the player more enjoyable. Can do.

  In this back movable production unit 3100, the back top decorative body 3152 is moved up and down between the retracted position and the first appearance position, moved up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, Can be moved up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and at the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the pupil can be prevented from jerking. By combining them, it is possible to perform a variety of movable effects and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Further, in the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, when the rear upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is in the second appearance position, the rear lower front drive motor 3202 is rotated to drive the back of the retracted position. The lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are moved to the appearance position located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 135). As a result, as shown in the drawing, the lower back-front first decorative body 3209 with the hand held is positioned in front of the back upper decorative body 3152 with the head (face) on, so that a predetermined character casts a spell. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the pair of shutters 3312 are separated by a back right shutter solenoid (not shown) in a normal state (a state where the first decorative surface 3310 is stopped to rotate forward). Then, the inner decorative body 3313 is caused to face forward from between the shutters 3312 (see FIG. 136), and the inner decorative body 3313 is decorated with light emission. Thereby, the arrival of an opportunity etc. can be suggested to a player.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotation decoration body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the gaming state is changed, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotating decorative body 3310 to stop the second decorative surface 3310b forward (front) (see FIG. 137). As a result, the back right character decoration 3318 of the second decorative surface 3310b can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the player can foresee the arrival of the chance by the recognition of the back right character decoration 3318.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotating decorative body 3310 to stop the third decorative surface 3310c toward the front (front) (see FIG. 138). As a result, the ball guiding member 3322 that spirals up and down in the back right effect space 3321 can be viewed from the player side, so that the game ball is supplied to the player in the back right effect space 3321. It is possible to make it seem that the timing of the game, that is, the upper prize winning opening 2006 will be opened, and the expectation for the game can be raised.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back left rotation is performed by driving the back left decoration body solenoid 3422 in a normal state (a state in which the first decorative surface 3410 is stopped to rotate forward). A back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body 3410 (see FIG. 136). As a result, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 projects from the back left rotating decorative body 3410 that rotates in a cylindrical shape, which can surprise the player and suggest that there may be something good. Can increase the expectation of the game.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is rotated by the rotational drive of the back left drive motor 3404. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the gaming state is changed, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation motor 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the first decorative surface 3410a toward the front (front) (see FIG. 114 and the like). Since this first decorative surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 simulating a door, the shutter 3312 of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back-right movable effect unit 3300 for the player. Similarly to the above, the door decoration 3411 can be thought to open, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the second decorative surface 3410b forward (front) (see FIG. 137). As a result, the back left character decoration 3413 of the second decorative surface 3410b can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the player can foresee the arrival of the chance by the recognition of the back left character decoration 3413.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the third decorative surface 3410c forward (front) (see FIG. 138). And although illustration is omitted, in this state, when red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decorative board 3417, a red pattern can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and blue light is emitted. Then, the blue symbol can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. Accordingly, the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can suggest the player that a chance has arrived, and the player can be entertained or expected.

  The back-right movable effect unit 3300 and the back-left moveable effect unit 3400 rotate the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 and the back-left rotation decoration body 3410 at the same time with the left and right ends (in the frame of the center accessory 2500). A movable effect can be performed on the left and right outer sides of the game board side effect display device 1600), and the rotating back right rotating decoration body 3310 and the back left rotating decoration body 3410 increase the expectation of the player and reduce the interest. Can be suppressed. In addition, by appropriately selecting the decorative surface for stopping the rotation of the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 and the back-left rotation decoration body 3410, it is possible to diversify the patterns of movable effects and make it difficult for the player to get bored. .

  Further, in the back-under-back movable production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back-under-bottom post-rotation decoration body 3568 is moved to a rising end position that is substantially the center within the frame of the center accessory 2500 by the rotational drive of the back-bottom back-up / down drive motor 3512. To rise. Then, when the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back lower back rotating drive motor 3553 (see FIG. 139). ). As a result, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 that is slightly desired to the player side above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 rises and is positioned at the center in the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player You can be surprised and think that there is something good, and you can raise the expectation for the game. In addition, since the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the game.

  Also, in the back-under-back movable production unit 3500, when the back-under-rear rotation decoration body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back-under-rear rotation rotation motor 3553 rotates the back-under-rear rotation decoration body 3568 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. If it does, it will rotate in the state which the four back bottom back rotation decoration bodies 3568 opened so that it might mutually separate, and became large (refer FIG. 140). Thereby, since the diameter of the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 becomes larger than when rotating counterclockwise, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the game.

  Further, in the back four corner movable production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 are positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the retracted position by the rotational driving of the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. It moves up and down to the appearance position (see FIG. 141). Thus, the appearance of the four back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 can surprise the player and suggest the arrival of a chance or the like.

  Further, in the back four-corner movable production unit 3600, the back four-corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 by the rotational driving of the back four-corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. Move (see FIG. 140). As a result, the appearance of the four back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 extending radially from the center of the center of the center object 2500 can surprise the player and something good. It can be thought that there is, and it can raise the expectation for the game. The back four-corner movable effect unit 3600 rotates the back four-corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 to the appearance position when the back-bottom rear-rotate decorative body 3568 of the back-bottom rear-movable effect unit 3500 is at the rising end position. It can appear as if a large shuriken has appeared in the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 140). Thereby, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state has occurred, to increase the sense of expectation for the game as much as possible, and to enhance the interest in the game.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310) will be described. FIG. 142 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first performs various registers and main processes as a process of step S1 on the condition that a RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated. The data stored in the control built-in RAM is initialized. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display are stopped. Special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for lottery processing for display mode in, and fluctuations used for lottery processing for a predetermined time (variable time) required for variable display control of the special symbol Based on a random number, a reach random number used in a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed by the game board side effect display device 1600 in response to the above-described special symbol variation display, based on the special random number Symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) used for lottery processing for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a big win, the operation trigger of the second start door member 2323 Etc. made per random number to be subjected to such a lottery process in Toraku (usually random), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is won, the second start opening 2004 is won. Even in this case, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 142 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2305, the first start port sensor 2107, the second start port sensor 2325, the upper large winning port sensor 2552, the lower large winning port sensor 2354, and the general winning port sensor 3050. For example, detection signals from various sensors are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the special symbol process processing including the lottery processing relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the processing of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second symbol) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a winning win as an operation trigger of the second start door member 2323 as the process of step S15. . Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.
Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is configured so that the driving frequency of the second start port door member 2323 is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding some big hits). The lottery process is executed (so-called short-time state). In this embodiment, such a short time state is realized by shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, in the time-short state control (referred to as time-shortening control), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 1 (per 100%), and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not set. When it is shortened to a predetermined time (for example, 0.08 seconds) shorter than the short-time state and the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful, the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is, for example, It is moved forward for 5.5 seconds to allow the game ball to be received at the second start port 2004 and then retracted again to disable the game ball from being received at the second start port 2004.

  On the other hand, in the non-time-short control, the second start is performed by setting the normal symbol winning probability to 0% and setting the time required for the normal symbol variation display control to a predetermined variation time (for example, 5 seconds). The game ball cannot be received in the mouth 2004. In the non-short-time state, the normal symbol winning probability may be set to 0% or more. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that of the short-time state (for example, 50%), and the normal symbol lottery result is a win. Then, the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced for a time shorter than the time-short state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start port 2004 again. You may make it reverse | omit and accept the game ball to the 2nd starting port 2004.

  That is, in the non-time-short state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 0%. In this case, even if the player hits the right, it is impossible to win a game ball at the second starting port 2004. Therefore, in the non-time-short state, the game ball is launched aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls win the first start port 2002 instead of the second start port 2004 (so-called “left” It is preferable to hit “)”.

  On the other hand, in the short time state, the normal symbol winning probability is 100%, and the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, it is easy to win a game ball to the second starting port 2004 by hitting right. Therefore, in the non-time-short state, the game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the center object 2500 so that many game balls win the second start port 2004 instead of the first start port 2002 (so-called “right” It is preferable to hit “)”.

  In addition, as the time reduction control, the control for increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol than the non-time reduction state, the control for shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol than the non-time reduction state, Control for extending the time period for advancing the two start port door members 2323 from the non-temporal state, control for increasing the number of times the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced than for the non-time state, Control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol in the special symbol display or the second special symbol display (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol in the game board side effect display device 1600) than the non-short-time state, Any one or any combination (all may be sufficient) may be performed.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 1510, for example, is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as a process of step S18.

  Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S19 as the first start port sensor 2107, the second start port sensor 2325, the upper large winning port sensor 2552, and the lower large winning port sensor. When the detection signals such as 2354 and the general prize opening sensor 3050 are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 951 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball wins the first start port 2002 and the first start port sensor 2107 is turned on, “3 balls”, the game ball wins the second start port 2004 and the second start. When the mouth sensor 2325 is turned on, “1 ball”, a game ball wins a prize at the above-mentioned winning prize opening (upper winning prize opening 2006, lower winning prize opening 2005) and an upper winning prize sensor 2552 or a lower winning prize sensor 2354. Is turned “14 balls”, a game ball is won in the general prize opening 2001, and when the general prize opening sensor 3050 is turned on, “10 balls” are paid out to the player. ing.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of holds as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 2107. On condition that the detection signal is on (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is stored in the main control. A first start port passing process such as storing in the first special symbol storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2325 is in the ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start-pass passage process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped are “4R normal jackpot”. , “4R latent chance big hit”, or “4R chance variation big hit” is suggested, after the lower big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or lower big prize winning opening 4R big hit gaming state (4R big hit gaming state simply open for a long time) that repeats the open / close pattern (round) to be closed four times when the lower big prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won in 2005 The result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R sudden hit big hit". In addition, the opening / closing pattern in which the lower big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closed is controlled 16 times repeatedly in a 16R big hit gaming state (sometimes referred to as a 16R big hit gaming state that is opened for a short time). Then, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “8R probability variation big hit”, the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). Seconds) or after closing the opening / closing pattern to be closed when the lower great prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won in the lower big prize opening 2005, the lower big prize opening 2005 is shortened. Open / close pattern that is closed after opening for a time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is controlled to 8R jackpot gaming state that repeats 8 times (sometimes referred to as 8R jackpot gaming state that is open for a long time). When the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). 16R big hit gaming state (simply open for a long time) that repeats the opening / closing pattern to be closed 16 times when the above-mentioned top prize winning hole sensor 2552 detects that nine game balls have been won at the top prize winning opening 2006. (Sometimes referred to as a 16R big hit gaming state). In addition, the lower big prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won after the lower big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) in the 4R big hit gaming state or at the lower big prize opening 2005. In this example, the opening / closing pattern (round) that is closed when closed is repeated 4 times, but after that, the lower closing prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then the opening / closing pattern that is closed is repeated 12 times. By substantially executing the control of the 4R big hit gaming state, the opening / closing pattern for controlling the opening / closing of the lower big prize opening 2005 is always repeated 16 times regardless of the type of the big hit when the big hit gaming state is reached. Yes, after 8 hours of winning the 8R big win game state, after opening the Shimodai prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or having 9 game balls won in the Shimodai prize opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern that is closed when it is detected by the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 is repeated eight times, and then the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the opening / closing pattern to be closed is not performed. You may do it. That is, as long as the number of repetitions of the round in which the game ball can be received at the lower prize winning opening 2005 substantially matches, the number of times is not limited to the above.

  In the present embodiment, a left-handed state in which a game based on a winning of a game ball mainly at the first starting port 2002 is executed, and a game based on a winning of a game ball mainly at the second starting port 2004 is executed. The right-handed state is controlled. Specifically, the right-handed state is controlled when the time-shortening control is being executed, while the left-handed state is controlled when the time-shortening control is not being executed. In the left-handed state, a long-open big hit game state of up to 8 rounds is executed, and in the right-handed state, a long-open big hit game state of up to 16 rounds is executed. Can get more prize balls than left-handed.

  In the big hit control process, after performing the opening control of such a large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006, lower large winning opening 2005), each set process of the high probability flag, the short time flag, and the short time counter is performed. Run. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is set until the next big hit is generated after being used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 148 described later (the first shown in FIG. 153 described later). Special symbol stop process or second special symbol stop process (not shown)).

  The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state), and the big hit (high probability time reduction state, low probability time reduction state) after the big hit gaming state ends ( 1R special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 153 which will be described later when the big hit gaming state based on 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden probability big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R big hit gaming state) is terminated. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S38), and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S37), a second special symbol including a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 2107 is in the on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reservation number of the first special symbol is the maximum value ( It is determined whether or not the upper limit value is “4” (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S43 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S41. And finish the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S42 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value (when a so-called “blurred ball” occurs), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of step S43 to step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S41). S45) By ending the processing, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2325 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” (step S52). In the process of step S52, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S53 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S51. And finish the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S52 that the number of the second special symbol hold is the maximum value (when a so-called “blurred ball” occurs), the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of step S53 to step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S55) By ending the process, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  A command (first hold) that indicates the number of hold of the first special symbol in the storage process (step S20) when the number of hold of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002 The number specifying command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the number of reserved special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the above storage process (step In S20), a command (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the number of hold of the second special symbol is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when a random number is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, a command (first blow ball designation command) for notifying the random number is also described above. When a random number is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the fact that it is set in the storage process and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and a game ball enters the second start port 2004, the random number is stored. A command to be notified (second play ball designation command) is also set by the above storage processing and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the first and second ball commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by the storage process, the stored contents of the first special symbol non-lottery storage area and the second special symbol non-lottery storage area are cleared. .

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. First special symbol in which the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read first special random number Normal processing (step S80)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )

  3. About the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the game board side effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process is performed (step S82)

  4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83).

  5. The first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display so that the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped is displayed. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 142).

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol, Read from. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 is obtained. The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting port 2004. The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that has occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  When the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state) (step S111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the high-probability time shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112). If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 149A is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 149 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-short time) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case of state and low probability short state) and jackpot judgment at high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short state, high probability short state) And a table. Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it matches with the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot, and 399 types of first jackpot determination values. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the special random numbers are coincident with the loss determination value indicating that the special random numbers are out of place (a jackpot probability at a low probability; 1/400). In this example, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the first special random number is used in the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. In the same manner as the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the jackpot determination value indicating that one kind of second special random number has won the jackpot, 399 kinds of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that it is (a big hit probability at a low probability; 1/400).

  Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the ten types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value, and the 390 types of first special random numbers are lost determination values. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other (a jackpot probability at a high probability; 1/40). In this example, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the first special random number is used in the high probability jackpot determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to for comparison with the jackpot determination value indicating that the ten types of second special random numbers have won the jackpot, 390 types of second special random numbers deviate from the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to be coincident with the loss judgment value indicating that (a big hit probability at a high probability; 1/40). Note that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referred to compare with the first special random number and the jackpot determination table referred to compare with the second special random number (the number of jackpot determination values is the same number). The jackpot judgment value may be different (the jackpot probability is common), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)) may be different. In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination values of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table may be made different (both may be made different).

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), A jackpot flag indicating that the change is won by the jackpot is set (step S116), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step S115 that a loss occurs, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in a high probability non-short-time state, and when the gaming state is in a high-probability short-time state. Reach determination table used in the case of high probability short-time state, and reach determination table in low-probability state used when the gaming state is low-probability state (low probability non-short-time state and low probability short-time state), It has. In the reach determination table in the high probability short-time state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached matches with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other.

  Further, the reach determination table in the low probability state has one reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability short time state reach. Then, the reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 kinds of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased compared to the high probability time short state.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short-time state, 6 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values indicating that the 66 reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach in the high probability non-short-time state is higher than that in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state (low-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state). Enhanced.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). A reach flag indicating that becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S121).

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 150, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 149 (B) and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined by comparing with the symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 149 (B), each symbol random number (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden variation big hit, 8R probability big hit, 16R probability big hit) is shown in the symbol determination table. The first symbol random number and the second symbol random number) are stored in association with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to a 4R big hit game state that can enter the lower big prize opening 2005 (easy), and then a low probability non-short state state (so-called normal state) until the next big hit game state occurs 4R normal big hit to control

  2. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to a 4R big hit game state that can enter the lower big prize opening 2005 (easy), and then controlled to a high probability non-short time state until the big hit game state occurs. 4R latent probability big hit that performs an effect that is difficult to determine that it is controlled to a probability state

  3. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state that can enter the lower big prize opening 2005 (easy), and then controlled to the high probability time short state until the big hit gaming state is generated.

  4). The game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit game state in which it is difficult to enter the lower major prize opening 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern that is closed after the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds). 16R sudden big hit is executed to control to a high probability short-time state until a big hit gaming state occurs, and to suddenly shift to a high probability short-time state without occurrence of a big hit gaming state in the middle of the game

  5. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 After repeating the pattern eight times, the game ball can enter the lower major prize opening 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern that closes after closing the lower major prize opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (easily) ) 8R big hit game state is controlled, and until the next big hit game state occurs, it is controlled to a high probability short-time state.

  6). Opening / closing to be closed when the upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when nine gaming balls are won in the upper prize winning opening 2006 by the upper prize winning opening sensor 2552. By repeating the pattern 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit gaming state in which the game ball can enter the upper prize winning opening 2006 (easy), and then controlled to a high probability time-short state until the big hit gaming state occurs.

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the second start door member 2323 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is executed, and the big hits related to the first special symbol (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R sudden big hit, 8R positive big change Big hit) will occur. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball is not won at the first start port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 occurs, and the change of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. Only the display is executed, and a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent positive hit, 4R positive change big hit, 16R positive change big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

  In addition, the jackpot related to the first special symbol can be repeatedly opened and closed eight times at the maximum lower prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), whereas it is related to the second special symbol. In the case of a big hit, the opening / closing pattern that opens the upper prize winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated 16 times, and the lower prize winning opening 2005 related to the first special symbol is opened for a long time ( For example, 28.5 seconds), the upper prize winning opening 2006 related to the second special symbol is opened for a longer time (for example, 28.5 seconds) than the ratio (31%) determined for the 8R probability variation big hit that repeats the opening / closing pattern of 8 times. In order to set the ratio (63%) determined for the 16R probability variation jackpot that repeats the opening / closing pattern 16 times to about twice, mainly based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 Technique it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls mainly compared to the left-handed state a player based on the winning of the game balls to the first start hole 2002 is executed in a right-handed state which is executed.

  When the 4R normal jackpot is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 4R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 4R latent probability jackpot is determined, the 4R latent jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. When the 4R probability variation big hit is decided, the 4R probability variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, when the 16R sudden variation big hit is decided, the 16R sudden variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variable big hit is decided The 8R probability variable big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. Although not shown, when the 4R normal big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 4R normal big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 4R latent big hit symbol is determined, the 4R latent big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. When the big hit symbol is determined, the 4R probability variable big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, the 4R probability variable big hit symbol is determined, and when the 16R probability variable big hit symbol is determined, the 16R probability variable big hit symbol is determined.

  In addition, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the first special symbol is not used as a variation stop mode (step S136), and then the number of big hits is set. The count counter is incremented by 1 (step S135b), and the process proceeds to step S137.

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 instructs the lottery result (the type of jackpot, the reach out, or the out (in the case of step S137) ( A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that a stop symbol form of the first special symbol may be instructed)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 controls display of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (variable display of left, middle, and right decorative symbols). Then, the display is stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol (note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a synchronized manner in the same symbol, and may be stopped at the same time). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 sets the 4R normal big hit out of the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbols displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is stopped. If specified, the 4R normal big hit symbol (the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols that are the same even number among the symbols “0” to “9”) is determined, and the 4R latent big hit symbol is determined as the big hit. When specified, it is decided to be a 4R latency big hit symbol (a combination where the same left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same even symbols among “0” to “9” decorative symbols as in the 4R normal big hit symbol) When 4R probability variation big hit is specified out of big hits, 4R probability variation big hit symbol is determined (a combination where the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all “1” or “9”). If specified, 16R When a big hit symbol is selected (a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols including all symbols “1”, “3”, and “5”), and 8R positive change big hit is specified among the big hits, 8R positive change When the big hit symbol (the combination where the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all “5”) is determined, and the 16R positive variable big hit is specified among the big hits, the 16R positive variable big hit symbol (left, middle and right decorative symbols are All combinations are “7”). In addition, when a reach loss is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of symbols having the same left and right decorative designs of “0” to “9” but having a different middle decorative design; reach lose If it is determined to be a symbol, and it is determined that it is out of place, it is determined to be a symbol that does not have reach (a combination of at least the left, right, and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). When the variation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 151, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big hit according to the type of big hit determined at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal deviation (reach effect). Is not executed), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of deviation (not shown) Is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol display is subjected to the variable display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this manner, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variation display of the special symbol. Production control is performed.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random numbers, second special random numbers) and design random numbers (first design random numbers, second design random numbers). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, 164 kinds of random numbers among 241 kinds of random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 kinds of random numbers are super reach with a low expectation degree of jackpot Determination values (223 to 240) are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is to be executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers are to execute any one of the super reach effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot. ) Is set. Superreach production has a higher jackpot expectation than normal reach production, and for players who want to generate a big hit gaming state, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is higher when the super reach production is executed. It is getting higher.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and used to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it is common to the non-short-time state and the short-time state. 12 seconds variation time is set. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of 0.3 seconds is set as the short time state. Is set, and the variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time-short state. Thus, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short-time state and in the non-short-time state, prompting the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004 during the short-time state, and the player starting the second time A time for winning a game ball in the mouth 2004 is secured.

  Further, as described above, in the right-handed state, only an interval through which one game ball can pass is provided to restrict the rolling of the game ball, and guide to the gate unit 2003 and the second start port 2004 with a very high probability. Is done. That is, in the right-handed state, the game ball is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a very high probability, and the normal symbol is a hit, and the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced. Then, the game balls are configured to be received at the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability (substantially all of the game balls that have been thrown to the right side of the center accessory 2500). In the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to be about 100%. When the normal symbol is hit, the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is set for a long period (5.5 in this example). For 2 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. In this example, when the player operates the handle 302, game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Then, when the launched game ball is driven to the right side of the center object 2500, the game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004 with a very high probability, and therefore the second start port door of the second start port 2004 in a short time state. In a state in which the member 2323 moves forward and the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004, a game ball wins in the second start port 2004 occurs at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. In this example, as described above, in the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol losing based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, the very short variation time is set to 0.3 seconds. . Further, the interval time from when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped to when the variable display is started again is set to about 0.6 seconds. That is, in the short time state, the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is extremely shortened compared to the non-short time state (variation time 12 seconds, interval time 0.6 seconds), and the game ball to the second start port 2004 is reduced. Since the difference between the winning interval and the execution interval of the variation display of the second special symbol is narrowed in the short time state, even if a large amount of game balls win the second starting port 2004 in a very short time, The variable display is executed in a very short time to prevent the number of second special symbols from being retained, and in the short time state, the number of variable displays per unit time is extremely increased compared to the non-short time state. This makes it possible to win the next big hit in a very short time compared to the previous gaming machine in the high probability short-time state that is controlled to shift to the right-handed state, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time , Can improve the game entertainment.

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 152, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 153, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. As the process of the above, the display control for causing the first special symbol display to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the game board side effect display device 1600 has a first control. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the decorative symbol display result corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, The time reduction flag is reset (step S189), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S194), this process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (4R normal big hit start command, 4R latent big hit per 4R normal big hit, 4R positive big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R sudden big hit, 8R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit) Start command, 4R probability variation jackpot start command, 16R sudden variation jackpot start command, 8R probability variation jackpot start command, 16R probability variation jackpot start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like.

[7. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control unit 1511 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control unit 1511 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 154, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control unit 1511 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 mS has elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed.
As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process of controlling the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on the command received from the main control board 1310 is executed. When the 16 mS steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the game is based on receiving the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process). Control processing related to the board-side effect display device 1600 and the effect operation unit 400 is executed.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speaker 921 or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3060 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16mS steady process is complete | finished within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is immediately started from the beginning when the 16 mS has passed since the start of the 16 mS steady process (command in step S601). Do not execute from analysis process. That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. Is not something For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 mS steady process.

[8. Battle production]
Next, the winning time shortening control will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 156 to FIG. 157 show that the above command analysis shows that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating that the reach (reach out of reach, per reach) is received when the high probability time-short state is controlled. FIG. 158 to FIG. 160 are timing charts of battle effects executed by the game board side effect display device 1600 when specified in the process (step S601). An example of a battle effect executed by the game board side effect display device 1600 when it is specified in the command analysis process (step S601) that a determination result notification command and a variation pattern command indicating reach are received. It is explanatory drawing shown.

  In this example, during the high probability time-short state, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a mode in which the main character 1600a walks, and the left, middle, and right decorations are displayed on the lower left portion of the game board side effect display device 1600. Reduce the symbol and execute variable display. Then, when the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating the reach are received, the enemy character 1600b is displayed so as to confront the main character 1600a, and the main character 1600a and the enemy character 1600b are confronted. Perform battle production. And when the received determination result notification command shows a big hit, the main character 1600a displays a mode of winning the enemy character 1600b as a result of the battle effect, and when the received determination result notification command shows a loss, As a result of the battle effect, a mode in which the main character 1600a is defeated by the enemy character 1600b is displayed.

Further, in the battle effect, the main character 1600a and the enemy character 1600b are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to face each other, and then blacked out (displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 by turning off the screen). The state in which it is not visually recognized), and then one of the main character 1600a and the enemy character 1600b is displayed. If the character displayed after the blackout indicates that a first strike is made, and the main character 1600a is displayed after the blackout, it will be a big hit.
On the other hand, when the enemy character 1600b is displayed after the blackout, if the attack of the enemy character 1600b is avoided, it will be a big hit. As described above, the player can recognize that the main character 1600a is displayed after the blackout, and that the player can recognize the big hit, and even if the enemy character 1600b is displayed after the blackout, the player can avoid the attack of the enemy character 1600b. It becomes possible to recognize that it is a big hit.

  In this way, even if it is determined that a big hit will be made in the middle of the battle production, if the battle production is continued and the variable display is executed for a long time, the special symbol per unit time will be displayed. Since the number of times of variable display is reduced, the number of wins of the big hit gaming state and the expected value of winning balls can be reduced, which may give a disadvantage to the player and lower the gaming interest. In this example, when it is determined that a big hit will be made in the middle of the battle performance, the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005) is controlled to be opened at that time to control the big hit gaming state. While starting, the direction of the battle is continued to be executed to the end. Details will be described below.

  In this example, battle production short and battle production long are provided as fluctuation patterns when reaching reach during a high probability short-time state, battle production short is executed only when it is a big hit, battle production long is a big hit This is executed both in the case where it becomes and the case where it becomes out of place. First, the battle effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect short will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 158 (A) to 159 (I). Note that in the high probability short-time state, a game is performed in which a game ball is made to enter the second starting port 2004 by making the right strike, and the game board side effect display device 1600 displays that effect (right strike →). Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability short-time state, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays the manner in which the main character 1600a is moving on the gaming board side effect display device 1600. . In this state, when the second special symbol process (step S39) is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, the main control MPU displays the second special symbol as shown in FIG. The display of the second special symbol is started to be displayed on the display, and a determination result notification command and a change pattern command (in this case, a determination result notification command indicating a big hit and a battle effect short change are displayed on the peripheral control board 1510. A variation pattern command indicating a pattern) is transmitted. When the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command are received from the main control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size on the lower left portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, When the variation time designated by the received variation pattern command has elapsed, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Also, when reach is indicated by the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU (reach is out of reach, reach is a big hit), the main character 1600a stops to something. The noticed aspect is displayed (FIG. 158 (B)).

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays the enemy character 1600b on the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to confront the main character 1600a (FIG. 158 (C)), and then the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 Is blacked out (FIG. 158 (D)). Then, the received judgment result notification command indicates that it is a big hit (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) that continues the high probability time-short state, and instructs the execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect short by the variation pattern command. If so, the peripheral control unit 1511 gradually brightens the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 so that only the main character 1600a is raised, and the left displayed on the lower left portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 is reduced. -Stop and display the middle and right decorative symbols in a big-hit manner (hit-hit symbol) and display "hit-win!" To notify the player that the big-hit will be made (Fig. 158 (E)).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 156, the variation time of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is the variation time of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. And the big special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display at a timing in the middle of the battle effect that only the main character 1600a emerges after blacking out the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. The main control MPU starts the opening control of the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005) based on the stop display of the big special symbol of the second special symbol. In addition, when the main control MPU starts the opening control of the big winning opening (the upper winning prize opening 2006 or the lower winning prize opening 2005), the peripheral control unit 1511 displays “big hit confirmed!” To display the big winning game state. In order to notify the start of the control, the player can recognize that the control of the big hit gaming state is started, and the player is disadvantaged without noticing that the control of the big hit gaming state is started. It can be deterred. In addition, if the player can be surely recognized that the control of the big hit gaming state is started, it is not limited to the above example, and the sound output of the speaker 921 etc. (The big hit starts. ), A display notifying that the big hit is started (starting the big hit), or the like may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 156, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously executes the battle effect even after the control of the big hit gaming state is started by the main control MPU, and displays a mode in which the main character 1600a attacks the enemy character 1600b. (FIG. 159 (F)). Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays “Press the button to stab the stop!” On the game board side effect display device 1600 and starts the timer to start the effective period measurement (FIG. 159 (G)). When the operation button 410 is operated, and the detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 440 is input to the peripheral control unit 1511, the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is not visible from the player side by the elevating unit 3510. From the retracted position (upward end position), it slides downward in an arc shape to move to the appearance position (downward end position) that is visible from the player side, and the rotary connecting member 3630 is rotated to rotate the back four corners second decoration The back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the body base 3631 and the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 is rotated (rotated) (FIG. 159 (H)). .

  Then, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays the winning state of the main character 1600a (FIG. 159 (I)), and then performs a jackpot gaming state effect display (a jackpot effect; a round effect display, etc.) as shown in FIG. To do. Thus, even if the big hit gaming state is started before the effect of the battle effect short is completed, the peripheral control unit 1511 continues to execute the effect of the battle effect short and according to the operation of the operation button 410. The appearance of the battle effect short is advanced by causing the rear decorative unit 3550 to appear behind the back (FIG. 159 (H)). In other words, when the battle effect is executed, the player operates the operation button 410 to cause the back bottom rotary ornament unit 3550 to appear in order to complete the effect of the battle effect short. In this way, since the production of the battle production short can be completed according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, the player's intention can be reflected in the production, and satisfaction and achievement can be obtained. A more attractive performance than a game machine can be executed. As shown in FIG. 156, the valid period of the operation button 410 is continued until one round of the big hit gaming state is completed, but even when the operation button 410 is not operated within the valid period. After the effective period has elapsed, the back-bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 may be exposed. If the operation button 410 is not operated within the effective period, the back-bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 is displayed. Alternatively, the mode in which the main character 1600a has won may be displayed.

  Also, in this example, the player is notified that a big hit is being made in the middle of the battle presentation, and the control of the big hit gaming state is started, and the continuation of the battle presentation is executed while the big hit gaming state is being executed, and the result of the presentation is displayed. In this way, the start time of the big hit gaming state that would otherwise be started after executing all of the battle effects is advanced, and the variation time of the battle presentation that is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state is shortened. The reduction in the number of special symbol variations is suppressed. Specifically, in this example, a period of 58 seconds to 87 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the operation button 410) is set as a period required to execute all effects of the battle effect short. However, the variation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect executed before the start of the big hit gaming state is 12 seconds, and after the variation pattern of the battle effect short is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 12 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and control of the big hit gaming state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect short (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but may be half or more of the whole period) are executed during the jackpot gaming state, The effect period of the battle effect short executed before the control is 12 seconds, whereas the effect period of the battle effect short executed during the big hit gaming state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the operation button 410) ).

  As described above, the period executed during the jackpot gaming state (period executed as the jackpot effect) among all the period required for execution of the battle effect short is the period (fluctuation time) executed before the start of the jackpot gaming state. ) To reduce the time required for variable display, and it is possible to suppress the reduction in the number of times of variable display of special symbols per unit time. As described above, in the big hit gaming state, after the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005) is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or below) An open / close pattern (round) that is closed when the game player has detected nine game balls in the big prize opening 2005) is detected a plurality of times (in this example, four rounds). Therefore, a period of a certain period or more is necessarily required from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end thereof. Then, some of the effects of the battle effect short are displayed before the start of the big hit gaming state. The display effect on the game board side is synchronized with the change display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol). Effect display executed by the device 1600) and the remaining effects are executed as a jackpot effect after the start of the jackpot gaming state, and a battle effect short effect period that is executed as a variable display effect before the start of the jackpot gaming state However, the variation time of the battle effect short is set so as to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect short executed as the jackpot effect after the start of the big hit gaming state. As a result, for the player, a battle effect is performed during the execution period of the big hit gaming state, in which the player simply manipulates the handle 302 and wins the game ball in the big prize opening 2006 or the lower big prize opening 2005. Executing a part of the short effect and making it possible to execute the effect of the battle effect short before the start of the big hit game state without being terminated halfway, while changing all the effects of the battle effect short As compared with the case where the second special symbol is displayed during fluctuation display, the battle effect short fluctuation time can be shortened by 46 to 75 seconds, so that the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is displayed. The period until the end of the big hit gaming state can be shortened, and the variation display time of special symbols per unit time is reduced by reducing the variation time Because it can be suppressed to, may increase the execution opportunities jackpot determination process. In addition, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed over a long period from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit gaming state, so the battle content is not simplified. It is possible to reduce the variation time by executing the production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the simplification of the production content.

  Further, in the above-described example, an effect (button effect) for requesting a button operation is executed after it has been determined that a big hit is achieved, and the back lower back rotating decorative body unit is operated based on the operation button 410 being operated within the effective period. 3550 is moved from a retracted position that cannot be viewed from the player side to an appearing position where it can be viewed. In other words, the player knows in advance that the big hit is confirmed, and the player knows in advance that if the operation button 410 is operated within the effective period, the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 will appear. The button production is being executed. Normally, the button effect is executed before the result of the variable display is confirmed, and if the result of the variable display is out of place, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body even if the operation button 410 is operated within the effective period If the unit 3550 is set to be less likely to appear from the retreat position to the appearance position, and the result of the variable display is a big hit, if the operation button 410 is operated within the effective period, the back and bottom rear rotation decoration The body unit 3550 is set to have a high possibility of appearing from the retreat position to the appearance position.

  In addition, as described above, the jackpot probability at the low probability is set to 1/400, and the jackpot probability at the high probability is set to 1/40. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated when the button effect is executed, the possibility that the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears from the retracted position to the appearance position is low. In this way, when the button effect is executed, even if the operation button 410 is operated, if the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 does not appear from the retracted position to the appearance position, the player is stressed and the operation is performed. Even if the button 410 is operated, there is a low possibility that the rear back rotating decorative unit 3550 will appear from the retreat position to the appearance position, and there is a possibility that the game entertainment will be lowered when the button effect is executed.

  In this example, when the button effect is executed after the big hit is determined as described above and the operation button 410 is operated within the effective period, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is sure to appear from the retracted position. Because the button effect is executed in a state where the player knows in advance that it will appear on the screen, the operation button 410 is operated to release the stress accumulated by the button effect executed before it is determined that the big hit Can be made. In addition, since it is determined that a big hit is made, the operation button 410 can be operated in a state in which attention is paid to surrounding players, and the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 can appear, so that a sense of superiority can be obtained. Yes, you can further enhance the joy of having a big hit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 157 and FIG. 158 (A) to FIG. 158 (D), FIG. 158 (E ′), FIG. 159, and FIG. explain. In addition, since the effect performed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect long includes the same effect as the effect performed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect short, the battle effect short for overlapping portions. Will be read as battle production long, and only the parts different from the battle production short production will be described below.

  158 (A) to 158 (D) by the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the reception of the determination result command and the variation pattern command (in this case, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the battle effect long) from the main control MPU. ), When the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 is gradually brightened and only the enemy character 1600b is raised (FIG. 158 (E ′)), an attack by the enemy character 1600b is performed. . Note that, as shown in FIG. 157, the attack by the enemy character 1600b is performed during the display of the variation of the second special symbol.

  The received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) that continues the high-probability time-short state, and the execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect long is instructed by the variation pattern command. In this case, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays an aspect in which the main character 1600a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1600b (FIG. 160 (F ′)), and is reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the game board side effect display device 1600. The left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner (hit-hit symbol), and the message “Attack avoidance! )). Thereafter, the effects of FIGS. 159 (F) to 159 (I) are executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 157, the variation time of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is the variation time of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. And the big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display at a timing during the battle production that the main character 1600a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1600b. Based on the stop display of the symbol, the main control MPU starts the opening control of the special winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005).

  On the other hand, the received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probable big hit) that ends the failure or high-probability short-time state, and executes the variation pattern of the battle effect long by the variation pattern command. Is displayed, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays a mode in which the main character 1600a receives the attack of the enemy character 1600b (FIG. 160 (F ″)), and the received determination result notification command may be out of order. For example, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are displayed in a reduced size in the lower left portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed in an off mode (in this case, out of reach symbols), and the received judgment result notification command is high. If it is a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit) that ends the short-term probability state, the game board side effect display device 16 Players are able to end the shift or high-probability short-time state by displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced scale at the lower left of 0 and displaying “Defeat ...” in a big-hit manner. (FIG. 160 (G ″)). Thereafter, if the received determination result notification command is out of place, the process returns to FIG. 158 (A) to display the manner in which the main character 1600a is moving on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the received determination result notification command is high. If the big hit that ends the short-term probability state (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit), the fact that the big hit gaming state is started and control of the big hit gaming state is executed, and then the processing returns to FIG. 158 (A) The mode in which the main character 1600a is moving is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  It should be noted that a period of 78 seconds to 107 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the operation button 410) is set as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long executed in the case of a big hit. However, the variation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect executed before the start of the big hit gaming state is 32 seconds, and after the variation pattern of the battle effect long is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 32 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and control of the big hit gaming state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect long (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but may be half or more of the whole period) are executed during the jackpot gaming state, The battle effect long effect period that is executed before the control is 32 seconds, while the battle effect long effect period that is executed during the big hit gaming state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the operation button 410). ).

  As described above, even when a battle effect having a longer effect period than the battle effect short is executed, the period executed during the jackpot gaming state among all the effect periods required for executing the battle effect long (executed as a jackpot effect) The time required for variable display is reduced by making the period of time) longer than the period (variable time) executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, and the number of times of special symbol variable display per unit time is reduced. Can be deterred. That is, some of the effects of the battle effect long are displayed before the start of the big hit gaming state. The display effect on the game board side is synchronized with the change display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol). (The effect display executed by the device 1600) and the remaining effects are executed as the jackpot effect after the start of the jackpot gaming state, and the battle effect long effect period is executed as the variable display effect before the start of the jackpot gaming state However, the battle effect long variation time is set so as to be relatively shorter than the battle effect long effect period that is executed as the jackpot effect after the start of the big hit game state. As a result, for the player, a battle effect is performed during the execution period of the big hit gaming state, in which the player simply manipulates the handle 302 and wins the game ball in the big prize opening 2006 or the lower big prize opening 2005. Execute a part of the long effect and execute all the effects of the long battle effect without ending the process. Compared to the case where the game is executed, the battle effect long change time is shortened by 46 seconds to 75 seconds and the change display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is started until the end of the big hit gaming state. The period of time can be shortened, and by reducing the fluctuation time, it can be suppressed that the number of fluctuation display times of special symbols per unit time is reduced. It may increase the line opportunity. In addition, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed over a long period from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit gaming state, so the battle content is not simplified. It is possible to reduce the variation time by executing the production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the simplification of the production content.

  Also, 65 seconds is required as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long that is executed when it becomes a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit) that ends the off-state or high probability short-time state. Is set. In other words, the variation time of the battle effect long that is executed in the case of a big hit (in this example, a 4R normal big hit, a 4R latent big hit) that ends the loss or high probability short-time state is set to 65 seconds. In addition, after executing the battle effect long and displaying the mode that the main character 1600a receives without being able to avoid the attack of the enemy character 1600b, the main character 1600a is revived and the effect of defeating the enemy character 1600b is executed. In this case, when the main character 1600a is restored, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and the jackpot symbol of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Then, after starting the control of the big hit gaming state, an effect of defeating the enemy character 1600b (for example, the effects of FIGS. 159 (F) to 159 (I)) may be executed. In this case, the period of the effect executed before the start of the jackpot gaming state may be longer than the period of the effect performed during the jackpot gaming state. Since the production period can be shortened compared to the case where the production is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the number of times of display of the special symbol per unit time.

  As mentioned above, although the preferred embodiment was mentioned and demonstrated about the said battle production, this example is not limited to these embodiment, In the range which does not deviate from the summary of the said embodiment as shown below, various It is possible to improve and change the design.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above example, what is performed during the high probability short-time state is shown, but the effect period is shortened as compared with the case where all the effects executed in relation to the variable display are executed before the start of the big hit gaming state. As long as the control is executed, it is not limited to the high-probability time-short state, but the low-probability non-time-short state (so-called normal state), the low-probability time-short state (so-called time-short state), the high-probability non-time-short state, and the high-probability time-short state. It may be executed in any one of (so-called probability variation states) or in any combination (or all). In addition, when the control for shortening the effect period is executed even in a case other than the high-probability short-time state, the appearance frequency and jackpot expectation degree of the effect may be varied for each gaming state. For example, in the non-time-short state (high probability non-time-short state, low-probability non-time-short state), the appearance frequency is lower than the time-short state (high-probability time-short state, low-probability time-short state), and the jackpot expectation is lower than that In the case of a big hit, it is possible to increase the selection ratio of the long version (battle production long) of the battle production in the non-time-short state, and increase the selection ratio of the short version (battle production short) of the battle production in the time-short state In the short-time state, the effect of shortening the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) to the end of the big hit gaming state may be enhanced as compared to the non-time-short state.

  In addition, as described above, in the variation pattern that is a big hit that continues the high probability short-time state between the battle production short and the battle production long, the button production is executed during the big hit gaming state, but depending on the operation timing of the operation button 410 You may make it vary the production content of the jackpot production performed after the end of a battle production. For example, when the button effect is executed, the operation button 410 is set as a valid period until a predetermined round (for example, 3 rounds) in the big hit gaming state is completed, and the operation button 410 is set in an early round (for example, until 2 rounds are completed). Is operated, a series of jackpot effects (video, etc.) are completed until the remaining round of the jackpot gaming state is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated in a late round (for example, three rounds). In such a case, a series of jackpot effects may be ended in the middle when the remaining rounds in the jackpot gaming state are executed while executing the same effects. In this way, when the operation timing of the operation button 410 is late, the big hit effect ends in the middle, so that the operation button 410 can be operated at an early timing.

  In addition, while executing a common jackpot effect regardless of the operation timing of the operation button 410 as described above, it is different depending on the operation timing of the operation button 410 whether the jackpot effect is executed or is ended in the middle. Not only those that are displayed, but different effects may be executed according to the operation timing of the operation button 410. For example, when the operation timing of the operation button 410 is early, an effect that will entertain the player is displayed. When the operation timing of the operation button 410 is late, the operation button 410 may be operated at an early timing by displaying an effect that makes the player uncomfortable, or when the operation button 410 is operated. (Round, Elapsed Time, Big Winner by operating the operation button 410 (Upper University Winner 2006 or Depending on the number of game balls that entered the big prize opening 2005), etc., depending on the type of jackpot effect that is executed after the end of the battle effect, the player himself also considers the type that is executed as the jackpot effect The operation effect may be completed by operating the operation button 410 at the determined timing. In this way, by making the subsequent development different according to the timing of operating the operation button 410, it is possible to entertain the game in the big hit gaming state by allowing the player to consider the timing of operating the operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect more attractive than the big hit effect executed in the conventional big hit game state.

  Also, the mode of the battle effect may be changed in accordance with the operation timing of the operation button 410. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 410 (round, elapsed time, big prize opening (up The effect display (for example, the back bottom back rotation decoration body unit) when the back bottom back rotation decoration body unit 3550 appears as the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2006 or the bottom big prize opening 2005) is earlier or later. When displaying a flame around 3550, the size and color of the flame may be flashy. As the operation timing of the operation button 410 is earlier, the operation button 410 can be operated at an earlier timing by making the effect display at the time of appearing the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 appear. The operation button 410 can be operated at a later timing by increasing the effect display when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears as the speed increases. Thus, by appropriately setting the effects, it is possible to guide the player to operate the operation button 410 at a predetermined timing.

  Further, as the operation timing of the operation button 410, a subsequent effect (battle effect) according to the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening (upper large prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005) until the operation button 410 is operated. In the case of changing the mode of either or both of the big hit effects, the big winning prize mouth (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower) in all the big hit gaming states executed after starting the control of the high probability short-time state You may make it change according to the number of game balls which entered the big winning opening 2005). In this case, since the aspect of the effect can be varied as the number of jackpot game states executed in the high probability short-time state increases, the player can be controlled according to the effect mode executed according to the number of jackpot game states. Can give a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and can further enhance the joy of being a big hit.

  Further, in the above example, when the button effect is executed and the operation button 410 is operated within the effective period, the effective period ends at that time, and the back and back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is moved a predetermined number of times (in this example, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this. Even if the back-bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 appears, it does not end the valid period, and if it is within the valid period, the back-bottom post-rotation decoration By operating the operation button 410 again after the body unit 3550 is retracted, the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 may appear, or a predetermined round in the big hit gaming state (even in all rounds If the operation button 410 is operated in a specific round (for example, until the end of the 10th round or an odd number of rounds), the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3 50 may appear so that the joy of having a big hit can be further increased, and the big hit by the appearance of the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 by the operation of the operation button 410 can be realized. Appeal to the surroundings and give a sense of superiority.

  Further, in the above example, the structure is such that a battle effect (battle effect short, battle effect long) can be executed not only in the case of a big hit, but also in the case of a loss, but it becomes a big hit during a high-probability time-short state. It is assumed that the variation pattern of the battle effect can be executed only in the case, and the battle effect may not be executed in the case of a deviation. By configuring in this way, when a battle effect is executed, it is always a big hit, so it is possible to pay attention to the effect with a margin and the timing at which the control of the big hit gaming state is started and the type of big hit (4R normal) The big hit, the 4R latent big hit, the 4R positive change big hit, and the 16R positive change big hit) can be noted.

  In addition, a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probable big hit) for ending the high-probability short-time state is instructed by the determination result notification command during the high-probability short-time state, and a battle effect (battle effect short, battle effect) by the variation pattern command When the variation pattern of “long” is instructed, the control of the big hit gaming state is started after the end of the battle effect, but the 4R big hit gaming state executed in this case is compared with the 16R big hit gaming state Since the period required from the start to the end of the big hit gaming state is short, even if the battle effect is executed as a variable display effect until the end, the special symbol (this In this case, the special symbol (in this case) compared to the period from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol to the end of the 16 jackpot gaming state It can shorten the period until the end of the 4 jackpot gaming state from the start of variable display of the second special symbol).

[6. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are moved by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that is thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, it abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that opens to the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2523 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the game ball is positioned directly above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the open lower prize winning opening 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn to the center side in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 and the first There is a possibility that it will be received in the starting port 2002 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when a game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters (is driven into) the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the downstream On the side, the region where the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 are provided flows down.

  When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it is in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the previous normal lottery ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “per time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). Note that the special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “ 15R big hit "," perpendicular change (probability change) per "," shorter time (shorter time) per "," shorter per probability change "," short per chance at the time of probable change ", etc.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the lower prize winning opening 2005 or the upper prize winning opening 2006 is in a state in which a game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the lower university winning opening 2005 or the upper university winning opening 2006 when the lower university winning opening 2005 or the upper university winning opening 2006 is in an open state, a predetermined number of pieces are received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. (For example, 10 or 13) game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321. Accordingly, when the lower university winning opening 2005 or the upper university winning opening 2006 is capable of receiving game balls, by allowing the lower university winning opening 2005 or the upper university winning opening 2006 to accept game balls, a lot of game balls are paid out. Can entertain the player.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the lower prize winning opening 2005 or the upper prize winning prize 2006 can accept a game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that is closed after reaching the open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the lower prize winning opening 2005 or the upper prize winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or An open / close pattern (a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are received into the lower university winning port 2005 or the upper university winning port 2006 is satisfied) A single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested by the acceptance of the game balls. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are turned on after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed such that the symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the lottery special lottery result occurs.

  The time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol string varies). The time until the fixed image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of the center accessory 2500, various ornaments of the back unit 3000, the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, and the back left movable effect The unit 3300, the back / upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back / under front movable effect unit 3500, and the like can be used as appropriate to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like. The player can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls can be stored below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is received such that the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. An upper plate 321 and a lower plate 322 are provided, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball are removed from the lower plate 322 by a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the hole 322a is difficult to see from the front (player) (is difficult to see), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be refreshed to improve the appearance. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power capable of attracting the interest of the user. In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball heading from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), a game in the lower plate 322 is made to the player. This makes it difficult to notice the flow of the sphere and can prevent distraction, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball release hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open. The game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and discharged smoothly (immediately) downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. It is possible to make an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is circulated to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate with respect to the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls to be stored in the lower plate 322 compared to the appearance.

  Further, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are transferred to the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the part between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, and discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower dish 322. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing so as to go around in the lower plate 322, and the game ball flowing through the lower plate 322 can be surely made difficult to visually recognize from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, if the lower tray discharge port is left open, the game medium supplied to the lower plate from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is immediately lowered from the lower tray discharge port without notifying the player by the guiding means. Therefore, the player can be given an illusion that the game medium is discharged below the lower plate (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game medium passes through the lower plate, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to view more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower dish 322 from the front, the lower dish visible from the front Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than double the size of the size that can be seen with respect to the size of 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured in the same manner as the lower plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward under the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is received such that the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. A production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 And a dish front lower decoration portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. Due to the shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a. But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large-sized production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, On the other hand, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power can be obtained. Then, the lower dish 322 is recessed backward from the dish front lower decoration part 326c that is recessed rearward on the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. A portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is circulated to the rear, and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (the volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, the player can be dedicated to the game, the game can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is placed on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the dish unit base 323), the lower dish cover 340, and the like. This allows the player to recognize that a sufficient amount of game balls has been secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the fingertip of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 is difficult to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity for a player who has become accustomed to a conventional pachinko machine, and to make the player feel at ease and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the part of the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. In comparison, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the side and upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) are covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player is placed in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertips from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the hand is put in, and to injure the player. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and can attract the player's interests, and the appealing power of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the decoration by the stage operation unit 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. Then, the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321, and a lower plate ball hole 322a that is vertically opened and closed, the conventional pachinko machine is provided. Because the player has the same function as the lower plate in the game, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused with the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with the pachinko machine 1, and it will be the same as in the past. It is possible to play the game with a simple feeling, and to entertain the player by dedicating the player to the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower dish ball opening hole 322a is not visible from the player side, can improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 clear, and can attract the player's attention strongly. Machine 1 can be used.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. The door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326. Attach the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside, and the outer diameter so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) Is about 15cm and the center swells away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) The operation button 410 having the transparent button lens 411 is attached, and the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 on the outer peripheral edge thereof. Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration are provided by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. It is possible to reduce the appearance of the outer edge, the rear side (rear side), and the like of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) from the gap between the member 432 (screen unit 470) And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410 are separated from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is increased to increase the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit). 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, the first button decoration portion 411a and the like can be favorably concealed, so that a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented while preventing the appearance from deteriorating. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player is strongly interested. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be attracted.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body part 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an oblique direction, the inner wall of the button base 413 can block the objects outside the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from being visible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the button lens 411 is located near the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the forward / backward direction of the operation button 410 Therefore, the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Accordingly, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so that the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 The side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or movable, and the door frame side effect display device that can entertain the player through the operation buttons 410. 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more entertaining can be realized.

  Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, design (decoration) is imparted to the operation button 410. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is made conspicuous and the player is interested. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  In the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

  Further, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411, and in cooperation with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b, Since the gap between the main body part 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body part 413a and the operation button internal decoration member 432 ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and accordingly, a space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly because the outer periphery has no directionality compared to a polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the size of the operation button 410 is increased, it is possible to perform a pressing operation without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate without confirming the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make the player easily touch the operation button 410 to perform a pressing operation, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, and to entertain the player and reduce the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the gaming state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is used. It is possible to entertain an effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by an effect image, a light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by actively engaging the player in the player participation type production. In addition, by performing the production within the operation button 410, it can be thought that there is something good depending on the player, and the expectation for the game is raised and the decrease in the interest is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and has high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 are enhanced. And a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

[Display of reserved memory in game board side effect display device 1600]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 162 (A), a first reserved number display area 1510 (first start port 2002) related to the first special symbol is displayed on the lower left side of the game board side effect display device 1600 that can be visually recognized by the player. The second reserved number display area 1580 (related to the second start port 2004) related to the second special symbol is set on the lower right side of the display panel.

  In FIG. 162 (A), in the first hold number display area 1510, two hold images 1521 and 1522 indicating that the first special symbol is held corresponding to the hold number of the lottery result are displayed. It is indicated that the first number of holds of the lottery result for the special symbol is “2”. In addition, in the second number-of-holds display area 1580, the hold image indicating that the second special symbol is held in correspondence with the second number of holds of the lottery result is not displayed, and the lottery is drawn for the second special symbol. It is shown that there are no pending results.

  In addition, the display of the 1st reservation number in the 1st reservation number display area 1510 about the 1st special symbol is the 1st reservation memory, the 2nd reservation memory, the 3rd reservation memory from the left toward the center, The hold images 1521 to 1524 are displayed as in the fourth hold storage. In addition, the second hold number in the second hold number display area 1580 for the second special symbol is displayed in the first hold memory, the second hold memory, the third hold from the center toward the right. The hold image is displayed like the hold storage and the fourth hold storage.

  Moreover, in this example, the hold images 1521 to 1524 representing the hold storage can take a plurality of types of display modes. For example, a plurality of types of display modes may be used, in which the image shape is the same and the display color is different, the image display color is the same and the shape is different, and both the image shape and the display color are different. obtain.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved images 1521 to 1524 indicating that the first special symbols are reserved and stored are displayed in a circular shape, and the display colors of the reserved images 1521 to 1524 are changed to a plurality of colors. I am going to do it.

  In FIG. 162 (A), the reserved image 1521 and the reserved image 1522 for the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory for the first special symbol are displayed in the normal display mode of the reserved memory, for example, in a circular shape. It is displayed in “blue” (first reserved image) and is visible to the player.

  Next, in FIG. 162 (B), the changing middle decorative symbol 1600b is stopped and displayed at the symbol “5”. As a result, the left decorative symbol is “7”, the middle decorative symbol is “5”, and the right decorative symbol is “5”. The symbol “7” is stopped and displayed, indicating that the player has been informed that the decorative symbol variation stop result is “reach off”.

  Next, FIG. 162 (C) shows that the symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c has started on the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600. Hereinafter, this is called digestion of reserved memory.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 in the command analysis process. The symbol variation of the symbol 1600a, the middle ornament symbol 1600b, and the right ornament symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, after this, the peripheral control unit 1511 has analyzed that the first hold number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board 1310 has been received by the command analysis process (step S601). Accordingly, the first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested and the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the second reserved for the first special symbol in FIG. 165 (A). The reserved image 1522 displayed as the memory becomes the new first reserved memory, is moved and displayed as the reserved image 1521 (circular and display color “blue”), and the first reserved symbol of the lottery result for the first special symbol The number is “1”.

[Hold change effect]
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display in the game board side effect display device 1600. In FIG. 163 (A), it is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601) that the first hold number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received during the variation of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c. Further, after that, the fact that the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board 1310 has been received is analyzed by the command analysis processing (step S601).

  In response to this, in the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600 in FIG. 163 (A), the second new one is newly displayed on the right side of the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory for the first special symbol. Hold image 1522 (circular and display color “blue”) is displayed, and the third hold memory is newly added on the right side of the hold image 1522 displayed as the second hold memory. The hold image 1523 (circular and display color “blue”) is displayed, indicating that the first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is “3”.

  Next, in FIG. 163 (B), the command analysis process (step S601) indicates that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received during the variation of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c. In response to this, the first special symbol further becomes the fourth reserved memory on the right side of the reserved image 1523 displayed as the third reserved memory, and the reserved image 1524 (displayed in a circular shape). The color “blue”) is displayed, indicating that the first reserved number of the lottery result is “4” for the first special symbol, and that the reserved storage number has reached the upper limit for the first special symbol. In the following description, the first hold number display area 1510 is simply referred to as the hold number display area 1510.

[Hold change effect using operation button 410 and hold image representing hold memory]
In a conventional gaming machine configured to perform a hold notice effect, the probability of a big hit is kept low in a normal gaming state and the probability of reaching is not so high. For this reason, the player had a low chance to see the hold notice effect. In other words, it can be said that there is a low probability that the hold notice effect will be performed.

  In addition, there is a case where a hold notice is made on condition that the operation button 410 is operated. Hereinafter, since the content of the effect changes when the player operates such an effect form, it is referred to as “participatory effect”. However, because there is a low probability that the hold notice effect will be performed, some players may not have the opportunity to operate the operation buttons provided for the effect as effective, and will be dissatisfied and reduce the interest of the game. There was a risk of it.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below relates to an invention relating to a gaming machine that makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of a game by expanding opportunities for participation in a participatory effect.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the production control may have a predetermined number (for example, “4” that is the upper limit) or less than the first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a hold change effect, on the condition that the number has reached a number (for example, “3” or “2”). That is, in this example, on the condition that the command analysis process (step S601) has analyzed that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board 1310 has been received, the hold change effect (hold notice) A lottery (referred to as a lottery for a pending change effect) is performed to determine whether or not to perform a production).

  When it is determined that the hold change effect is to be performed in the lottery of the hold change effect, the player operates the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 is detected by the effect button press detection sensor 440. In addition, a hold change effect of changing the display color of the hold image representing the hold storage is performed.

[Hold change effect screen]
In the hold change effect of this example, the display color (referred to as the final display color) of the hold image to be finally displayed is determined based on the start winning timing. FIG. 163 (C) shows an example of a hold change effect screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when it is determined to perform the hold change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (C), the left, middle and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the game board side effect display device 1600. Furthermore, in the approximate center of the game board-side effect display device 1600, a character “The color of the hold changes when you press the button!” Is displayed, suggesting that the operation on the operation button 410 is effective, and the game It is shown that the user is prompted to operate the button.

  The effective period for validating the operation on the operation button can be arbitrarily set, but as an example, the next control command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received. Until the command is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601).

  As the control command, for example, any one of a stop display command, a jackpot start command, a determination result notification command, a first hold number designation command, or a combination selected from a plurality of these control commands is used. Can do. In this example, for easy understanding of the explanation, it is assumed that the next stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received until it is analyzed by the command analysis processing (step S601).

  FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change effect using a hold number display in the game board side effect display device 1600 performed subsequent to FIG. 163 (C). In FIG. 164 (A), as a result of the player performing an operation on the operation button 440 (first time) in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, in FIG. 164 (C), the fourth reserved memory and Thus, it is shown that the display color of the reserved image 1524 (the circular display color “blue”) displayed in the normal display mode has changed to “green”.

  Although not explicitly shown in FIG. 163 (C) and FIG. 164, during the on-hold change effect, the display color of the on-hold image in the on-hold storage that is targeted for the button operation by the player changes each time. The final display color of the hold image stored in the hold memory is determined in advance when it is determined to perform the hold change effect. In the specific example shown in the figure, it is assumed that the final display color of the target hold image in the hold storage is determined to be “red”. As a result, the display color of the target hold image in the hold storage is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 in the final display color determined as a result.

  In FIG. 164 (A), the characters “The hold color will change when the button is pressed!” Are displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation button 440 is displayed. It is suggested that the operation to the button is effective, and the player is prompted to operate the button.

  Next, in FIG. 164 (B), as a result of the player performing an operation on the operation button 410 (second time) in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, the fourth in FIG. 164 (A). It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (circular and display color “green”) is changed to “yellow”.

  Here, among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the upper right part of the game board side effect display device 1600, the left decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol “3”, and the middle / right symbols are displayed. The decorative pattern of continues to change display.

  In FIG. 164 (B), the characters “The color of the hold changes when you press the button!” Are displayed in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is suggested to be effective, and the player is prompted to operate the button.

  Next, in FIG. 164 (C), as a result of the player performing an operation on the operation button 440 (third time) in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, the fourth in FIG. 164 (B). It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (circular and display color “yellow”) is changed to “rainbow”.

  Here, among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the upper right part of the game board side effect display device 1600, the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol “3”, and the inner decorative symbol is displayed. Only the decorative symbols in the symbols continue to be changed. In addition, the stop symbol “3” of the left and right decorative symbols indicates that reach has occurred.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display in the game board side effect display device 1600 performed subsequent to FIG. 164 (C). In FIG. 165 (A), in response to the fact that the stop display command received from the main control board 1310 is identified by the command analysis processing in step S601 by the peripheral control unit 1511, the changing medium decoration symbol 1600b is changed to the symbol “ 4 ”is stopped, the reduced display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in the upper right part of the game board side effect display device 1600 is canceled, and the original position and size of the center in the game board side effect display device 1600 are eliminated. As a result, the left decorative symbol is “3”, the middle decorative symbol is “4” and the right decorative symbol is “3”, and the decorative symbol variation stop result is “reach off”. This indicates that the player has been notified.

  In FIG. 165 (A), in response to the fact that the stop display command is specified in the command analysis processing in step S601, from the display mode of the game board side effect display device 1600, “When the button is pressed, the color of the hold is displayed. The character “I will change!” Has disappeared, suggesting that the operation on the operation button 410 is no longer effective (the validity period for enabling the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 has ended). It has been shown.

  In this way, the hold change effect is performed on the condition that the number of holds indicated by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4). It has become. For this reason, the player is widely given an opportunity to perform the hold change effect. In addition, every time the operation button 410 is operated during execution of the hold change effect, the hold memory (the fourth hold memory in this example) that is the target displayed in the hold number display area 1510 is held. The display color of the image 1524 changes. Therefore, during the on-hold change effect, the player is given an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 not only once but multiple times. Moreover, each time the operation button 410 is operated, the display color of the reserved image in the target stored memory changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity which can participate in a hold production participation type production is expanded, the fall of game entertainment can be suppressed.

[Relationship between reserved memory digestion and reserved images]
FIGS. 165 (B) to 165 (C) show how the reserved memory is being digested. First, FIG. 165 (B) shows that after the four reserved memories in FIG. 165 (A), two reserved memories have been digested.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 specifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 in the command analysis processing in step S601. The symbol variation of the symbol 1600a, the middle ornament symbol 1600b, and the right ornament symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, after this, the peripheral control unit 1511 analyzes that the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received by the command analysis process (step S601). Accordingly, the first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, and the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the second to fourth for the first special symbol in FIG. 165 (A). The reserved images 1522 (display color “blue”), 1523 (display color “blue”), and 1524 display color “rainbow” displayed as the first reserved memory are the new first to third reserved memories. The reserved image 1521 (circular and display color “blue”), the reserved image 1522 (circular and display color “blue”), and the reserved image 1523 (circular and display color “rainbow”) are moved and displayed. The first pending the number of lottery results for the pattern is "3".

  Next, in response to the fact that the stop display command received from the main control board 1310 is specified by the command analysis processing in step S601 by the peripheral control unit 1511, the changing medium decoration symbol 1600b is omitted from the symbol. As a result, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped with a combination of dissociated symbols, and the player is informed that the decorative symbol variation stop result is “displaced”. Suppose.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 in the command analysis processing in step S601, and in response thereto, the game board side effect display device 1600 In FIG. 2, the symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  After that, the peripheral control unit 1511 analyzes that the first hold number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board 1310 has been received by the command analysis process (step S601). Accordingly, the first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, and the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and in FIG. 165 (A), the first reserved memory disappears. 1523 (display color “blue”) and 1524 (display color “rainbow”), which are displayed as the second to third reserved memories for the special symbol, become the new first and second reserved memories. 1521 (circular and display color “blue”) and moving image 1522 (circular and display color “rainbow”) are moved and displayed, and the first reserved number of the lottery result is “2” for the first special symbol. FIG. 165 (B) shows the result of the above process.

  Thereafter, in response to the stop display command received from the main control board 1310 specified by the peripheral control M unit 1511 in the command analysis processing of step S601, the changing medium decoration symbol 1600b is omitted from the symbol. , `` Out of design '' is displayed as a stop, and as a result, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are displayed as a combination of out of design, and the decorative design change stop result is Suppose that it was notified.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 in the command analysis processing in step S601, and in response thereto, the game board side effect display device 1600 In FIG. 2, the symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, after this, the peripheral control unit 1511 has analyzed that the first hold number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board 1310 has been received by the command analysis process (step S601). Accordingly, the first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, and the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and in FIG. 15223 (display color “rainbow”) that was displayed as the second reserved memory for the special symbol becomes the new first reserved memory in FIG. 165 (C), and the reserved image 1521 (circular display color “red”). ”) And the first hold number of the lottery result is“ 1 ”for the first special symbol.

  Thus, in this example, the display color of the hold image in the hold storage that is the target in the above example is changed to “rainbow” by the player's operation to the operation button 410 during the hold change effect. The final display color of the hold image stored in the hold storage is determined in advance when it is decided to perform the hold change effect.

  The effects developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 are closely related to the reach variation state and the jackpot notification state of the lottery symbols displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The level of interest and attention is very high.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect has ended, in other words, even after the effective period of the operation button 410 has ended, the first hold number display area 1510 is accompanied by the digestion of the hold memory. The display color of the hold image (the hold image in which the display color is changed) that is the target of sequentially moving the display position toward the hold storage is maintained as it is without being changed. For this reason, in order for the player to proceed with the game, the effect information provided from the game board side effect display device 1600 is not adversely affected, and consideration is given so as not to lower the interest of the game. Yes.

  In the specific example shown in the figure, when the hold image in the hold storage that is the target is displayed as the first hold storage in the hold number display area 1510, the display color is changed to the predetermined final display color “red”. As a result, the reserved image stored in the reserved storage is displayed. For this reason, it is surprised and surprising to a player who intends to change the color of the reserved image by operating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player's game.

  FIG. 166 is a time schematically representing the hold change effect of this example, the change in the display color of the target hold image, and the display color of the hold image whose display position is to be changed as the hold memory is digested. It is a chart.

  As shown in FIG. 166, the variation time of the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display by the main control MPU and the variation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 It almost matches. In addition, during the change of the first special symbol, the value of the first special holding number counter of the main control MPU is updated to “4” due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2002, and the main control The first hold number designation command “4” is output from the board.

  Whether the peripheral control unit 1511 performs the hold change effect on the condition that the command analysis process (step S601) has analyzed that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board 1310 has been received. As a result of determining whether or not to hold change effect, it is determined that the hold change effect is to be performed in the hold change effect lottery. In this example, the fourth hold memory is set as the hold memory for the effect, and the player The operation (referred to as button operation) to the upper plate effect button 257 is enabled. In addition, as the fourth reserved memory determined as the advance notice object, a normal display color reserved image 1524 (circle-shaped display color “blue”), which is described as “blue 4” in the figure, is displayed. Yes.

  Further, in the hold change effect of this example, the display color of the hold image to be finally displayed (referred to as the final display color) is determined based on the start winning timing. Assume that the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “red”.

  In FIG. 166, display of the hold image 1524 as the fourth hold memory determined as the production target described as “green 4” as a result of the first button operation by the player during the symbol change. The color has changed to “green”. Thereafter, as a result of the second button operation by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory that is described as “Yellow 4”, which is described as “Yellow 4”, is changed to “Yellow”. It has changed. Thereafter, as a result of the third button operation by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory, which is described as “Rainbow 4”, which is determined as the production target, is “Rainbow”. Has changed.

  Thereafter, a stop display command is output from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol has stopped. The peripheral control unit 1511 stops the variation of the decorative symbols on the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600 in response to the stop display command specified by the command analysis processing in step S601. At the same time, it is indicated that the button operation is no longer valid (the validity period for validating the operation on the operation button 410 has ended).

  After that, the main control MPU displays the variation of the decoration symbol as the number of the first special symbol is retained, and in FIG. 166, each variation of the first special symbol and the decoration symbol of the first special symbol display is performed. The display is performed three times. The first hold number designation command 3 (hereinafter, simply referred to as the hold number designation command 3) is output as the first hold memory is consumed, and the display position of the hold image is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 accordingly. And the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory determined as the production target is shifted to the reserved image as the third reserved memory described as “Rainbow 3” without changing the display color. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, the first hold number designation command 2 (hereinafter simply referred to as the hold number designation command 2) is output with the digestion of the second hold memory, and the hold image is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 accordingly. The display image is shifted and the hold image 1524 as the third hold memory determined as the production target is the hold image as the second hold memory described as “rainbow 2” without changing the display color. It is shifted and displayed.

  Further, as the third hold memory is consumed, the first hold number designation command 1 (hereinafter simply referred to as the hold number designation command 1) is output, and in response to this, the hold number display area 1510 displays the hold image. The display position is shifted and the hold image 1524 as the third hold memory determined as the production target is changed as the first hold memory described as “red 1” by changing the determined final display color. Is displayed shifted to the hold image.

[Each process related to the pending storage notice by the peripheral control unit 1511]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control unit 1511 in connection with the hold storage as each process in the effect control process in step S602 in FIG. In the effect control process, the peripheral control unit 1511 sequentially performs a hold number designation command process (step A100), a hold change effect determination process (step A200), a hold change effect process (step A300), and a hold image shift process (step A400). Run. The substantial execution conditions in each process are as described below.

  When it is determined that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. 155 is the first pending number designation command (hereinafter simply referred to as the pending number designation command) In the production control process of S602, the hold number designation command process of step A100 is executed.

  In the hold number designation command process in step A100, when it is determined that the number of hold memories has reached a predetermined number (in this example, “4”, for example) as the execution condition of the hold change effect for changing the hold image In step A200, the pending change effect determination process is substantially executed.

  When the hold change effect determination process of step A200 is substantially executed and it is determined to perform the hold change effect, the hold change effect process of step A300 is substantially executed. In step A100, when it is determined that the number of holds has decreased by one, and it is determined that the display position of the hold image needs to be shifted, the hold image shift process is substantially executed.

[Hold count specification command processing]
The hold number designation command process is executed when it is determined that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 is a hold number designation command. It is transmitted from the main control board 1310. The hold number designation command is a control command that is output when the hold number (memory number) managed in the main control board 1310 changes, and is a command that designates the hold number.
Hold number designation command “0” for designating the hold number “0 (none)”,
Hold number designation command “1” for designating the hold number “1”,
Hold number designation command “2” for designating the hold number “2”,
Hold number designation command “3” for designating the hold number “3”,
Hold number designation command “4” for designating the hold number “4” (upper limit number),
There are five types.

  FIG. 168 to FIG. 169 are flowcharts showing a subroutine of the hold number designation command processing executed by the peripheral control unit 1511. When the peripheral control unit 1511 starts the pending number designation command processing, first, the pending number designated by the pending number designation command analyzed by the command analysis in step S601 is “0” (hereinafter simply referred to as the designated pending number). (Step A110).

  If the peripheral control unit 1511 determines in step A110 that the designated hold number is “0”, the peripheral control unit 1511 sets a value 0 to the first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step S110). A111), the first to fourth reserved image storage areas set in the built-in RAM (not shown) are cleared (step A112), and the subroutine for the reserved number designation command process is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating each table, storage area, and processing operation necessary for the peripheral control unit 1511 to perform each process related to the hold storage. As shown in FIG. 173 (D), the built-in RAM is provided with a first reserved image storage area to a fourth reserved image storage area corresponding to values 1 to 4, respectively, in the first reserved number counter. .

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control unit 1511 determines in step A110 that the designated hold number is not “0”, the peripheral control unit 1511 proceeds to step A113 and determines whether or not the designated hold number is “4”. It is determined (whether or not a predetermined number is reached in advance) (step A113). In this example, it is determined to perform a hold change effect by a hold image on the condition that the value of the hold number has reached a predetermined number. The predetermined number is described as “4” in this example, but is not limited thereto. The predetermined number may be a smaller number, for example, “3” or “2”.

  If the peripheral control unit 1511 determines in step A113 that the designated hold number is “4”, the peripheral control unit 1511 sets a value 4 to the first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step S113). A114), the reserved image (circular shape) is set to the fourth in the reserved image storage area (step A115), and the display color of the reserved image is set to normal (in this example, “blue”) (step A116). The execution flag for the hold change effect determining process is set (step A117), and the process returns from the hold number designation command process subroutine to the effect control process routine.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control unit 1511 determines in step A113 that the designated number of holds is not “4”, the peripheral control unit 1511 proceeds to step A113. In this case, the designated number of holds is any one of “1”, “2”, and “3”. In step A114, the peripheral control unit 1511 compares the designated hold number with the value of the first hold number counter (step A120).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the comparison result is an increase of “+1” (step A121). When it is determined that the comparison result is an increase of “+1”, for example, when the designated number of holds is “3” and the value of the first hold number counter is 2, for storing the number of holds The value is incremented by 1 in the first hold number counter (step A122), and the hold image (circular shape) is set in the hold image storage area (see FIG. 173 (D)) corresponding to the value of the first hold number counter (step A123). ), The display color of the hold image is set to normal (“blue” in this example) (step A124), the subroutine for the hold number designation command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A121 that the result of the comparison is not an increase of “+1”, for example, if the designated hold number is “3” and the value of the first hold number counter is 4, or For example, when the designated hold number is “2” and the value of the first hold number counter is 3, the comparison result is “−1”.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 determines that step A121 is NO, decrements the value of the first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step A126), and a shift flag for executing the hold image shift process described later. Is set to 1 (execution) (step A127), the suspension number designation command process subroutine is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

[Hold change effect decision processing]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart illustrating a subroutine of hold change effect determination processing executed by the peripheral control unit 1511. When the peripheral control unit 1511 starts the hold change effect determination process, it first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A130). The execution flag is set in step A117 of the pending number designation command processing described above.

  In step A130, if the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if step A130 is determined to be NO, the suspension change effect determination processing subroutine is performed without performing substantial processing. The process returns to the effect control process routine.

  In step A130, if it is determined that the execution flag is set, that is, if step A130 is determined to be YES, the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires a random number (eg, 0 to 99) for holding change effects ( Step A131), referring to the value of the obtained random number for hold change effect and the hold change effect determination table (step A132), it is determined whether or not the hold change effect is performed (step A133).

  FIG. 173 (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution rate of a hold change effect determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 173 (A), in this example, it is determined to perform the hold change effect at a distribution rate of 70%. A separate effect (an effect that is not a hold change effect) is performed for the remaining distribution ratio of 30%.

  If it is determined in step A133 that the hold change effect is not performed, that is, if step A133 is determined as NO, the peripheral control unit 1511 proceeds to step A140 and clears the execution flag of the hold change effect determination process ( Step A140), the suspension change effect determination process subroutine is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the substantial hold change effect process described later is not executed.

  If it is determined in step A133 that the hold change effect is to be performed, that is, if step A133 is determined to be YES, the peripheral control unit 1511 proceeds to step A134 and sets the execution flag of the hold change effect process (step A134). ). Thereby, execution of the hold change effect process is determined.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires a final display color random number (for example, 0 to 6) (step A135), refers to the acquired final display color determination random number value and the final display color determination table, and performs final display. A color is determined (step A136), and the reserved image of the determined final display color is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step A137).

  FIG. 173B is a diagram illustrating an example of a final display color determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 173 (B), if the obtained final display color determining random number value is “0”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “blue”, and if it is “1”, the reserved image is determined. The final display color is determined to be “yellow”. If it is “2”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “green”. If it is “3”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “orange”. If it is “4”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “purple”, if it is “5”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “red”, and if it is “6”, it is determined to be the reserved image Is determined to be “rainbow”.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 sets “1 (with storage)” to the storage flag indicating that the final display color is stored (step A138), and determines what number of the hold image is the target of the hold change effect. The number representing the display location, in this example, “4” is set to the value of the display location counter to be represented (step A139), the process proceeds to step A140, the execution flag of the hold change effect determination process is cleared (step A140), and the hold change Return to the effect control process routine after exiting the effect determination process subroutine. In this case, the hold change effect process is executed.

[Hold change effect processing]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart illustrating a subroutine of hold change effect processing executed by the peripheral control unit 1511. When starting the hold change effect process, the peripheral control unit 1511 first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A150). The execution flag is set in step A134 of the hold change effect determination process described above.

  In step A150, if the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if step A150 is determined to be NO, the sub-routine of the hold change effect process is performed without performing substantial processing. Return to the effect control process routine. In this case, the hold change effect is not substantially performed.

  If it is determined in step A150 that the execution flag is set, that is, if step A150 is determined to be YES, whether or not there is a button operation (whether the operation button 410 has been pressed) or not. Is determined (step A151). That is, the state in which the execution flag is set is a state in which the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is validated.

  In step A151, if it is determined that there is a button operation, that is, if step A151 is determined to be YES, the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires an operation random number (for example, 0 to 6) (step A152). The operation random number and the display color selection table at the time of operation are referred to (Step A153), the display color is determined (Step A154), and the reserved image of the determined display color is displayed as a fourth image shown in FIG. The image is stored in the reserved image storage area (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A156.

  FIG. 173 (C) is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation display color selection table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 173 (C), if the acquired random number for operation is “0”, the display color of the reserved image is determined as “rainbow”, and if it is “1”, the display color of the reserved image is “Yellow” is determined. If “2”, the display color of the reserved image is determined as “green”. If “3”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined as “orange”. If so, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “purple”. If it is “5”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “green”. "Rainbow" is decided.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that there is no button operation, that is, if step A151 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control unit 1511 directly performs step A156 without performing steps A152 to A155. Proceed to

  In step A156, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not a stop display command is received (step A156). That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that a stop display command has been received when it is specified that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 is a stop display command.

  If it is determined in step A156 that the stop display command has been received, that is, if step A156 is determined to be YES, the peripheral control unit 1511 clears the execution flag of the hold change effect process (step A157). Then, the subroutine of the hold change effect process is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the subsequent hold change effect is not performed. Further, in this example, the state in which the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is valid ends.

  In step A156, if the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that no stop display command is received, that is, if step A156 is determined to be NO, the process of step A157 is performed without performing the process of step A157. Exit the subroutine and return to the effect control process routine. In this case, since the execution flag is set, the suspension change effect processing subroutine is subsequently executed. For this reason, every time there is a button operation, step A152 to step A155 are executed. For this reason, the display color of the reserved image changes.

  In this way, the hold change effect is performed on the condition that the number of holds indicated by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4). It has become. For this reason, the player is widely given an opportunity to perform the hold change effect. In addition, during the execution of the hold change effect, every time an operation is performed on the operation input device (operation button 410), the display color of the hold image 1524 to be displayed displayed in the hold number display area 1510 changes. . Therefore, during the hold change effect, an opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is given not only once but multiple times. Moreover, every time the operation button 410 is operated, the display color of the reserved image to be produced changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect by the hold change effect has been expanded, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

[Hold image shift processing]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart illustrating a subroutine of the hold image shift process executed by the peripheral control unit 1511. When the peripheral control unit 1511 starts the hold image shift process, it first determines whether or not the shift flag is set (step A160). The shift flag is set in step A127 of the hold number designation command process described above.

  If it is determined in step A160 that the shift flag is not set, that is, if step A160 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes the suspended image shift processing subroutine without performing substantial processing. Return to the effect control process routine. In this case, the hold image display position is not substantially shifted (moved one place to the left).

  If it is determined in step A160 that the shift flag is set, that is, if step A160 is determined to be YES, the second to fourth reserved image storage areas in FIG. 173 (D). Are stored in copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown) (step A161), the first to fourth reserved image storage areas are cleared (step A162), and copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown) are stored. ) Are stored in the first to third reserved image storage areas (step A163). See FIG. 173 (E).

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the storage flag is set (step A164). The storage flag is set in step A138 of the hold change effect determination process described above.

  In step A164, if the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the storage flag is not set, that is, if step A164 is determined to be NO, the hold image shift is performed without performing each processing of step A165 to step A169. The process subroutine is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, only the display position of the hold image is substantially shifted (moved one place to the left).

  On the other hand, in step A164, when it is determined that the storage flag is set, that is, in the case where step A164 is determined as YES, the peripheral control unit 1511 indicates that the hold change effect has been performed. The peripheral control unit 1511 decrements the value of the display location counter by 1 (step A165), proceeds to step A166, and determines whether or not the value of the display location counter is “1 (position for displaying the hold image in the final display color)”. Is determined (step A166). By the process of step A165, the display position of the reserved image that is the production target is updated.

  In step A166, if the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the value of the display location counter is not “1”, that is, if step A166 is determined to be NO, each processing of step A167 to step A169 is performed. Instead, the process exits the subroutine for the reserved image shift process and returns to the routine for the effect control process. In this case, substantially only the shift of the display position of the hold image (moving to the left by one) is performed.

  On the other hand, in step A166, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the value of the display location counter is “1”, that is, when step A166 is determined to be YES, each process of step A167 to step A169 is performed. I do. That is, the final display color hold image determined and stored in advance is stored in the first hold image storage area (step A167), the storage flag is cleared (step A168), and the display location counter is set to “0”. Set (step A169), the process exits the suspended image shift process subroutine and returns to the effect control process routine.

  Note that the display of the hold image on the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed by outputting the image data in the information output process of step S605 in FIG.

  As is clear from the above description, even if the player has never performed a button operation, the hold image [normal display color “blue”] that is the target of the production is the first. When the display position is reached, the reserved image is displayed in the final display color determined and stored previously, and the display color changes.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect is over, in other words, even after the effective period of the game board side effect display device 1600 is over, the first hold number display area 1510 is accompanied by the digestion of the hold memory. Thus, the display color of the hold image (the hold image whose display color is changed) as the production target for sequentially moving the display position toward the first hold memory is maintained as it is. For this reason, in order for the player to proceed with the game, the effect information provided from the game board side effect display device 1600 is not adversely affected, and consideration is given so as not to lower the interest of the game. Yes.

  In the specific example shown in the figure, when the hold image to be produced is displayed as the first hold memory in the hold number display area 1510, it is changed to a predetermined final display color, for example, “red”. The reserved image that is the target of the production is displayed. For this reason, it is surprised and surprising to a player who intends to change the color of the reserved image by operating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player's game.

  As described above, the embodiment related to the hold change effect has been described. However, the hold image may change to a display color different from a normal display color, for example, “blue”, and the hold image may be displayed in the final display color at the final display position. The player's imagination is all about how it is received by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for changing the display color of the reserved image is that the reserved number has reached a predetermined number. For this reason, it is not limited by whether or not the reserved storage that won the start opening is a big hit, whether or not reach occurs, and the like.

  In the above-described embodiment, the stop display command is received as the end of the valid period of the button operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot start command, the determination result notification command, the first hold number designation command Or any of them. For example, when a jackpot start command is received as the end of the button operation valid period, the button operation becomes effective over a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays until the jackpot game is started. The display color will change.

  For this reason, during the on-hold change effect, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation button 410 is given not only to the variation display by one decoration symbol but also to the variation display by a plurality of decoration symbols. . Moreover, every time the operation button 410 is operated, the display color of the reserved image to be produced changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect by the hold change effect has been expanded, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

[Example of production of door frame side production display device]
Further, in the various embodiments described above, the example in which the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is used as a simple push button in the same manner as a general effect button has been described. A special effect (button display effect) using the door frame side effect display device 460 of the unit 400 may be executed.

  In the modification described below, a first modification in which a button display effect is added to the above-described reservation notice effect and a second modification showing a button display effect performed in other forms will be described.

[First modification in which a button display effect is added to the hold notice effect]
The button display effect of the first modification will be described below.
First, in a standby state where the pachinko machine 1 is not played by the player, or when a game is being performed by the player and no button display effect is being performed, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame) The side second effect display device 460A) is not displayed for energy saving, or a logo corresponding to the model of the game board 5, a manufacturer-specific logo, or the like is displayed (default display). Since the door frame side effect display device 460 has a narrow image displayable range and is vertically long compared to the game board side effect display device 1600, a predetermined number of characters are displayed in the vertical direction of the vertically long screen. Messages scroll from bottom to top. In this modification, the maximum number of characters in the vertical direction is set to the maximum number of characters, and the message image of the logo corresponding to the model of the game board 5 or the manufacturer-specific logo is scrolled from the bottom to the top at a predetermined scroll speed. After all the message images are displayed, display control is performed so that scroll display is repeated again.

  And, similar to the hold notice effect in the above-described embodiment, in the hold notice effect where the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is put on hold, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays “When the button is pressed, the color of the hold changes! All of the message images that lead to the operation promotion such as “” are displayed at a time, suggesting that the operation on the effect button 410 is effective, and the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the button is executed. ing. Here, in the first modified example, during the hold notice effect, the door frame side effect display device 460 also displays a message image that leads to operation promotion such as “Pressing the button changes the color of the hold!”. It has become. In addition to the above messages, any message that displays the same message as the game board side effect display device 1600 or a message having the same meaning can be selected as appropriate according to the gaming state.

  Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 has a narrow image displayable range and is vertically long as compared with the game board side effect display device 1600, like the game board side effect display device 1600, when the “button is pressed”. The message is scrolled from bottom to top so that some characters are displayed in the vertical direction on the vertical screen without displaying all of the message image "The color of the hold will change!" The In the present modification, the maximum number of characters is 3 in the vertical direction, and all messages such as “the color of the hold changes when the button is pressed!” Are displayed at least once within the period when the operation on the operation button 410 is valid. Display control is performed so that scroll display is performed from the bottom to the top at the scroll speed. The size of the characters sequentially displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is the same size as the size of one character of the message image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or the game board side effect display. A character having a size larger than the size of one character of the message image displayed on the device 1600 is displayed. This makes it easy for the player to identify the message image even though the display device has a relatively small size.

  Note that the scroll speed is different depending on the type of operation promotion effect, because the length of the period during which the operation on the operation button 410 is valid and the number and type of messages are different, so multiple scroll speeds are stored depending on the case. A scroll speed is selected and set based on the type of operation promotion effect to be executed (“valid period length” is different from “number of characters / type of message”) (scroll speed setting means).

  For example, when different messages are scroll-displayed for the same effective period, the scroll speed is set as follows. Specifically, when displaying a message image (17 characters) of “If you press the button, the color of the hold will change!” For the effective period of “5 seconds”, all characters will be scrolled for 5 seconds. However, even if the player has finished viewing all of the message images, the scroll speed A (for example, 17 characters can be scrolled and displayed in 4 seconds, which can cause a margin period to allow operation of the operation buttons 410). And a scroll display is performed. Further, when displaying a message image (eight characters) of “Press the button !!” as another message image, all the characters are scrolled twice for 5 seconds, and the message image is displayed twice. Scroll speed B that allows a margin period to allow operation of the operation button 410 even for a player who has finished watching (for example, a scroll period of 8 characters is completed twice in 4 seconds and a margin period of 1 second. Scrolling display is set. In this way, the player who has been gazing at the message image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 by setting the scroll speed so that a margin period is created when displaying various message images can be obtained. In addition, the operation on the operation button 410 can be enabled.

Moreover, although the first LED 422a, 423b and the second LED 422b, 423a are arranged in the above-described production operation unit 400 and the periphery of the operation button 410 is described as light-emitting decoration, in this example, the decoration is not limited to decoration. In the button display effect, it has a function of suggesting a game state to the player by light emission.
Hereinafter, a description will be given using FIG.

161 is a front view of the rendering operation unit 400. FIG.
In FIG. 161, in order to easily explain the suggestion of the game situation for the player using the LED, the portion that is decorated with light emission will be referred to as a light emitting portion.
In this example, a plurality of light emitting portions are provided on the outer side and the inner side around the operation button 410, respectively. The inner light emitting section includes six left light emitting sections 401a to 401c on the left side of the operation button 410 and inner right light emitting sections 402a to 402c on the right side. The outer light emitting units include outer light emitting units 403a to 403h, that is, a total of eight light emitting units (outer light emitting units) so as to surround the operation button 410.

In the state where the button display effect is not performed, all of the inside and outside light emitting units and the first button decoration unit 411a of the effect operation unit 400 are turned off to reduce power consumption as much as possible.
In addition, when a button display effect is performed, the inside and outside light emitting units of the effect operation unit 400 and the first button decoration unit 411a are all turned on all at once. In this way, by switching from a state in which all the light emitting units are turned off to a state in which all the light emitting units are turned on, the player's attention can be gathered in the production operation unit 400 and the start of the production requiring the operation button 410 can be strongly impressed. In addition, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by suddenly lighting a place that has not been lit up until then, so that it is possible to increase the expectation for the button display effect and to improve the interest in the game.

  Then, after all of the inner and outer light emitting portions of the production operation unit 400 and the first button decoration portion 411a are turned on all at once, the inner and outer light emitting portions are gradually turned off as the effective period elapses. Effective period suggesting light emission control for turning off the first button decoration portion 411a is performed. In the effective period suggesting light emission control, during the button display effect, the operation for the operation button 410 is an effective period, and the remaining period of the effective period is determined by the inner and outer light emitting units and the first button decoration unit 411a. It can clearly show to the player who pays attention to the production operation unit 400 with the light emitting decoration.

  As a pattern of the effective period suggesting light emission control, the outer light emitting units 403a to 403h are turned off by a predetermined number clockwise (for example, from the outer light emitting units 403a and 403b, and then 403c and 403d, for every predetermined time (for example, every one second). After turning off all of the outer and inner light emitting parts, the left and right inner left light emitting parts 401a-c and inner right light emitting parts 402a-cLED are turned off, and finally the first button decoration part Light emission pattern A for turning off 411a, and turning off the outer light emitting units 403a-h toward the center after a certain time (for example, every one second elapses) (extinguishing from the outer light emitting units 403a, 403e, and then 403b, 403d, 403f) , 403h, etc., the left and right 403c, 403g are turned off last), and all the outer light emitting parts 403a-h are turned off. Left and right inner left light unit 401A～c, turns off the inner right light unit 402A～cLED, finally turns off the first button escutcheon 411a provided a light emitting pattern B.

  Further, in the case of the operation promotion effect in the button display effect, the message pattern displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, for example. A display pattern A in which the message character color is displayed in white and a display pattern B in which the message character color is displayed in red are provided. Similarly, in the message displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, a button display pattern A in which the character color is displayed in white and a button display pattern B in which the character color is displayed in red are provided.

Further, in the operation promotion effect in this example, the combination of the display patterns A and B, the button display patterns A and B, and the light emission patterns A and B represents a high expectation level for the big hit through the hold notice effect for the player. It is like that.
In this example, the peripheral control unit determines the patterns A and B, and the determination mode of the patterns A and B depends on whether or not there is a hold leading to a big hit in the hold that is the target of the hold notice effect. Different. That is, the display pattern A, the button display pattern A, and the light emission pattern A are assumed to have a low expectation for the jackpot, and the display pattern B, the button display pattern B, and the light emission pattern B are assumed to have a high expectation for the jackpot.

For example, when the display pattern is A, the button display pattern is B, and the light emission pattern is A, and when the display pattern is B, the button display pattern is A, and the light emission pattern is B, the latter has a higher degree of expectation for the jackpot. high. That is, among the combinations of the display patterns A and B, the button display patterns A and B, and the light emission patterns A and B, the greater the number of patterns A, the lower the expectation for the big hit, and the larger the number of various patterns B, The expectation for is high.
As a result, it is not just a suggestion means for prompting the operation on the operation button 410, but it has a high performance structure that can make the player feel irritated by the mode of the operation promotion effect. It can be maintained in a high state.

  In addition, when an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, and when the valid period expires without detecting the operation, all the light emitting units on the inside and outside of the rendering operation unit 400 are turned off and “hold when the button is pressed” Deletes the message image saying “The color of is changed?” And ends the promotion effect.

  Further, when an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, an explanation effect of the effect that is to be developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the detection of the release of the operation is displayed on the door frame side effect display device. 460 (means for displaying a message different from that of the central liquid crystal display device 1500). Note that while the operation on the operation button 410 is being performed, the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 may be covered with a hand, so the player displays the door frame side effect display device 460. By starting the explanation effect when the screen is visible (when the cancellation of the operation is detected), it is possible to reliably transmit the explanation effect to the player from the initial state. As an explanation effect, for example, a message image of “Chance if the color of the hold changes!” Is scroll-displayed on the door frame effect display device 460 for a predetermined time. As the predetermined time for the explanation effect, a time (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which the message image “Chance if the color of the hold changes!” Can be scroll-displayed at a predetermined scroll speed is set.

  In addition, when the valid period of the operation with respect to the operation button 410 has expired without detecting the pressing operation, an auxiliary effect is performed to promote the next operation. As an auxiliary effect, for example, a message image “What happened if I pressed it ...” is scroll-displayed on the door frame effect display device 460. As the predetermined time for the auxiliary effect, a time (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which the message image “What happens if you press it ...” can be scrolled at a predetermined scroll speed is set. Further, the auxiliary effect continues to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 across the special symbol variation until the operation button 410 is operated, and the player can operate the operation button 410 in the next button display effect. Encourage promotion to be made.

  In this way, by continuing to display the message image “If something happens if you press it ...”, it will temporarily give the player sparseness. Thus, the player's operation with respect to the operation button 410 can be activated, and as a result, the player's participation in the button display effect can be promoted. When the hold notice effect is performed next time, the auxiliary effect is ended at the start of the hold notice effect even if the operation button 410 is not operated.

  By making use of the fact that the player visually recognizes the operation button 410 when operating the operation button 410, the promotion effect, the explanation effect, and the auxiliary effect are performed within the door frame side effect display device 460, thereby giving the player a button display effect. The flow and meaning can be reliably transmitted and explained, the fun of the participation of the player can be deepened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Second Modification showing Button Display Effects Performed in Other Forms]
Further, the button display effect is not limited to the operation promotion effect, but can be used for various other effects. For example, game ball display according to the game state may be performed by the door frame side effect display device 460, the outer light emitting unit, and the inner light emitting unit. In the game display in which the left-handed game is recommended (the state without time reduction), the “left arrow image” is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, and the game state in which the right-handed is recommended (a state with time reduction). In the big hit state), the “right arrow image” is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, along with the above-described display, control is performed to turn on and off the outer light-emitting section sequentially from “right to left” or “left to right”. More specifically, in the case of a gaming state that recommends “right to left”, that is, left-handed, the outer light emitting unit 403c is first blinked once. Next, the outer light emitting unit 403b and the outer light emitting unit 403d are blinked once. Next, the outer light emitting unit 403a and the outer light emitting unit 403e are blinked once. Next, the outer light emitting unit 403f and the outer light emitting unit 403h are blinked once. Finally, the outer light emitting unit 403g blinks once. As a result, the outer light-emitting portion 403 is lit so as to flow from right to left, so that it can be recalled by intuitively left-handed. In the case of a gaming state in which “left to right” is recommended, that is, a right-handed game state is recommended, the outer light emitting units are sequentially turned on and off in the reverse order to the “right to left” case.
Further, in the inner light emitting unit, the left inner light emitting units 401a to 401c are turned on in the gaming state in which left-handed is recommended, and on the contrary, in the gaming state in which right inner is recommended, the inner right light emitting units 402a to 402c are turned on. Lights up.

  With the above-described configuration, the player can actively transmit the left and right hits to the player by performing the hit display on the part that is easily noticed by the player, and further the hit display on the door frame side. Thus, the board design of the game board 5 can be facilitated.

  In addition, the start / end control of such classified display may be controlled as follows. For example, when a game state (such as a state with a short time) that recommends right-handed strikes occurs, the display of the “right arrow image” is started on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, it is possible to make a strong impression of the direction of the placement and to prevent mistakes in the placement. In addition, when the player detects an operation on the operation button 410 while the “right arrow image” is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the “right” displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is displayed. The “arrow image” may be hidden (erased).

  Depending on the player, there is a possibility that the display on the door frame side effect display device 460 may be troublesome, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered. Further, when the “right arrow image” displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is not displayed (erased) by detecting an operation on the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays “ Instead of the “right arrow image”, the current gaming state may be displayed. For example, when the time is short, “short time!”, When “probable change!”, When “probably changing!” For example, it is possible to display the game state. Thereby, it is possible to make the player grasp not only the recommendation of the placement in the current gaming state but also why the right strike is recommended.

In addition, as a button display effect, a standby state in which a player is not playing a game, that is, a standby button display effect dedicated to a so-called customer waiting state may be performed.
The standby state occurs when a predetermined standby state occurrence condition (a certain period of time elapses without any symbol fluctuation in the normal state) is satisfied, and a standby button display effect is started when the standby state occurs. In the standby button display effect, a demonstration message is displayed on the door frame side effect display device. As an example of the demonstration message display, for example, the model name of the game board 5 and the name of the manufacturer can be scroll-displayed. It is possible to enhance the decorativeness and the effect of attracting customers by displaying messages on the parts that are easily noticed by hall customers.

  In addition, a message image of “resting” may be displayed when the player leaves the table temporarily in the standby state. In this case, a message image of “resting” is displayed on both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by detecting the button operation, and the message image of “breaking” is displayed. It may be controlled to delete the message image “breaking” when the button operation is detected. By displaying such a message image at a place that is easily noticed by the player, it is possible to prevent other hall customers from accidentally starting the game and causing trouble.

[Error indication]
If the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state for some reason (eg, a ball is jammed), an image (for example, a message “please remove the ball”, etc.) is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1600. However, at this time, by operating the operation button 410, the error image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden, and the error image is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 410. It has become. Thereby, it is possible to prevent sparseness and annoyance caused by being displayed until the attendant of the game hall rushes.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 is not limited to liquid crystal, and may be a dot matrix display.

  Moreover, although the example which arrange | positions the door frame side effect display apparatus 460 separately from the button lens 411 (operation receiving part) was shown in the Example mentioned above, it is not limited to this, The door frame side effect display apparatus 460 is shown. May be configured to be pushed together with the button lens 411 (operation receiving portion).

  Moreover, although the example which scroll-displays a message image on the door frame side production | presentation display apparatus 460 was demonstrated in the Example mentioned above, you may make it display not only scroll display but by switching one character at a time. In this case, by setting the character display size so that one character is displayed using the entire screen of the door frame side effect display device 460, a message is sent to the player even though the display device has a relatively small size. Images can be more easily identified.

  In addition, the message scroll-displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is not limited to scrolling from bottom to top, but scrolling from top to bottom, scrolling from left to right, scrolling from right to left You may do. In addition, scrolling may not be performed as long as the entire message can be grasped by the number of characters (for example, “push”, “PUSH”, etc.) within the range of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the method of expressing the high degree of expectation for the big hit in the operation promotion effect to the player is not limited to the combination of the display patterns A and B, the button display patterns A and B, and the light emission patterns A and B described above. In addition, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be suggested, for example, by the scroll direction, the scroll speed, and the like.

  For example, a scroll pattern A in which a message scrolls from the bottom to the top and a scroll pattern B in which the message scrolls from the top to the bottom are provided. Further, at the message scroll speed, all the messages are at least once. A scroll speed A to be displayed and a scroll speed B to display all messages at least twice are provided. The combination of the scroll patterns A and B and the scroll speeds A and B represents a high expectation level for the big hit to the player. For example, among the various patterns, the greater the number of patterns B, the higher the expectation for jackpot.

  In the button display effect, it has been described that the same message as the game board side effect display device 1600 or a message having the same meaning is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, but the door frame side effect display device 460 is displayed. The display / non-display of can be configured to be switchable. In this case, switching may be performed as appropriate by an operation on a predetermined operation unit by a player or a hall attendant. Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays not only the hold notice effect but also the message image such as “Press the button !!” displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the battle effect of the embodiment described above. The scroll display may be performed.

  In the above-described “effective period suggesting light emission control”, during the button display effect, the operation of the operation button 410 using the outer and inner light emitting units is an effective period, and the remaining period of the effective period is suggested. However, the configuration suggested by the door frame side effect display device 460 is not limited to the outer and inner light emitting units. In this example, during the period when the operation on the operation button 410 is valid, simultaneously with “effective period suggesting light emission control”, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays the number of seconds corresponding to the valid period, and the player is counted down. As compared with the case where only the “effective period suggesting light emission control” is executed, the player can intuitively grasp the effective period.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the explanation effect is performed by detecting the release of the push operation. However, the explanation effect is immediately provided by detecting the push operation without detecting the release of the push operation. You may make it perform. Further, as an effect performed by detecting the pressing operation, the following effect may be performed instead of the explanatory effect. For example, after the message image “When the button is pressed, the color of the hold changes ?!” is erased, while the pressing operation is detected (while the pressing operation is performed), the door frame side effect display device 460 is displayed on the entire surface. A configuration may be adopted in which an image of a predetermined color is displayed and the brightness of the image display is higher than when a message image is displayed. Then, the degree of expectation of jackpot may be changed (for example, a red image) depending on the type of image of a predetermined color (white image, red image, etc.) displayed on the entire surface of the door frame side effect display device 460. Are more likely to win big hits than white images). By doing this, while operating the operation button 410, a decorative effect is created such that light leaks from the gap of the player's hand blocking the door frame side effect display device 460, and the light emission color Since the degree of expectation for the big hit can be changed, the game entertainment can be improved with a new effect of noting the display image of the door frame side effect display device 460 while the operation button 410 is being operated.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine, or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined, Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 in which the first button decoration portion 411a is not formed may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the operation button 410 is provided with the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button frame 412 is not attached. You may make it form the decoration part for concealing a rear side over the perimeter in the site | part corresponding to the button frame 412 in the lens 411. FIG.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the base unit 430 (the first unit) is arranged so that the operation button 410 surrounds the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Although the one provided with the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect are provided. At least one base unit 430 (second base unit 450) may be protruded so as to surround only part of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or may be a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a sticker or a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. In addition, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as a texture, a slit, and a prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate 322 is shown as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. It is not limited to this, but a lower dish that is recessed backward from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or only recessed from the right outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps behind. You may make it.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) where the lower plate 322 is recessed backward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a polygonal column surface or a front surface recessed in a polyhedron shape.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Equipped with an operation device "," equipped with a rotating body with decoration on the surface "," equipped with a decoration with decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration "," game " A unit including a character, an item, a logo, and a decorative body that three-dimensionally simulates a scene (diorama) in accordance with the machine concept may be attached.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (reserved area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although an example in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 may be difficult to visually recognize from the front. You may make it difficult to visually recognize the whole plate 322 from the front.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame base unit 320 Dish unit 321 Upper plate 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate ball release hole (lower plate discharge port)
322b Escapement part 322c Sphere guidance part (guidance means)
322d Buffer (guidance means)
322e Return part (guidance means)
323 Plate unit base 323c Lower plate ball supply port 324 Upper plate body 325 Lower plate body 326 Plate unit cover (cover)
326a Production operation unit mounting part (covering part)
326b Upper dish part 326c Before dish lower part 326d Lower dish opening 327 Upper dish ball release button (discharge operation part)
340 Lower plate cover 400 Production operation unit (cover)
400A Second production operation unit (cover)
401a Inner left light emitting unit 401b Inner left light emitting unit 401c Inner left light emitting unit 402a Inner right light emitting unit 402b Inner right light emitting unit 402c Inner right light emitting unit 403a Outer light emitting unit 403b Outer light emitting unit 403c Outer light emitting unit 403d Outer light emitting unit 403e Outer light emitting unit 403e 403f Outer light emitting unit 403g Outer light emitting unit 403h Outer light emitting unit 410 Operation button (operation receiving unit)
411 button lens 460 door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
550 Door frame right side unit 551 Right unit base 552 Door frame right side decorative board 552A Door frame right side upper decorative board 552B Door frame right side lower decorative board 552a Left LED
552b Right LED
552c Medium LED
5520a LED board 5520b LED board 5520c LED board 5520d LED board 553 Right unit left diffusing lens member 553a Main body part 553b Rear wall part 553c Notch part 553d Housing recess 553e Input lens part 553f Side reflection part 554 Right unit left decorative member 554a Side part 554b Outer surface portion 554c Inner surface portion 555 Right unit left cover 556 Right unit right diffuser lens member 556a Main body portion 556b Rear wall portion 556c Notch portion 556d Housing recess portion 556e Input lens portion 556f Side surface reflecting portion 557 Right unit right decorative member 557a Side portion 557b Outer surface portion 557c Inner surface portion 557d Uneven portion 5570 Lower end 5571 Lower end 5572 Lower end 5573 Lower end 5574 First light guide sheet 5575 Second light guide sheet 5576 Third light guide sheet 558 Right unit right cover 559 Right unit left light shielding member 559a Main body portion 559b Rear wall portion 559c Notch 559d Reinforcement portion 560 Right unit right light shielding member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative portion 561b Multi-surface decorative portion 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decoration Member 565 Decorative sheet discriminating member 565a Discriminating sensor 565b Discriminating sensor 565c Discriminating sensor 565d Discriminating sensor 565e Decorative sheet detecting sensor 565f Sheet type discriminating sensor 566 Partition plate 566a Side portion 5660 Rough surface portion 5661 Reflecting plate 5661 Light guide path 5663 Light incident portion 5664 Light exit Portion 567 Shading plate 1000 Front component member 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guide portion 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stop portion 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Security recess 1009 Positioning projection 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engagement step 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step 1122 Through hole 1123 Projection pin 1124 Engagement claw 1125 Engagement piece 1126 Out port 1127 Notch 1128 Mounting hole 1129 Insertion port 1150 Game panel (2nd embodiment)
1151 Out port 1152 Notch 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Substrate holder 1201 Discharge part 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1511 Control unit 1512 Liquid crystal display control unit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1600 Game board side effect display device (first effect display means)
1601 Left fixed piece 1602 Right fixed piece 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate unit 2004 Second starting port 2005 Lower major winning port 2006 Upper major winning port 2100 Starting port unit 2101 Unit base 2102 Ball receiving member 2103 Front decoration base 2104 Front decoration board 2105 Front decoration member 2106 Guide passage member 2107 First start port sensor 2200 Side unit 2201 Unit base 2201a First shelf 2201b Protruding portion 2202 First ball receiving member 2203 Second ball receiving member 2203a First Two shelf part 2203b Sphere receiving part 2204 Side decoration board 2205 Board cover 2205a Guiding part 2300 Attacker unit 2305 Gate sensor 2560 Upper movable effect unit 2570 Lower movable effect unit 3100 Backward possible Production unit 3200 back under before moving production unit 3300 back right movable production unit 3400 Urahidari mobile production unit 3500 back under after moving production unit 3600 back four corners mobile production unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a predetermined game using a game medium and gives a predetermined game value based on a result of the game,
Control means for controlling effects related to the game;
Operation means having an operation receiving portion for receiving an operation by a player;
First effect display means for performing a predetermined display effect based on control by the control means;
A second effect display means provided separately from the first effect display means, wherein a predetermined display effect is performed based on control by the control means;
With
The operation receiving portion is made of a transparent member, and the second effect display means is disposed so as to be visible through the operation receiving portion,
The control means includes
A pre-operation display effect that is controlled so that a predetermined pre-operation display effect is performed by the first effect display device and the second effect display device before the operation device is operated within a predetermined operation effective period. Execution means;
After-operation display effect execution means for controlling the first effect display means and the second effect display means to perform a predetermined post-operation display effect after the operation means is operated within the operation effective period. When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: